JP2020062558A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of motivation to a game felt by a player.SOLUTION: A peripheral control MPU controls a sound source built-in VDP so as to create a synthetic screen (synthetic image) for synthesizing a screen (image) to be displayed on a display area of a sub liquid crystal display device to a screen (image) to be displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display device 1900, when finding failure of the sub liquid crystal display device, therefore even when the screen (image) cannot be displayed on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device due to failure of the sub liquid crystal display device, because the screen (image) to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device is synthesized to the screen (image) to be displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that, such a situation in which, the screen (image) to be displayed on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device cannot be provided to a player due to failure of the sub liquid crystal display device, can be prevented.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 160

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that outputs a sound signal amplified to a level corresponding to a volume set by a volume to a speaker (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-30651, A

  By the way, in the gaming machine, since a notification sound for notifying a salesclerk in the hall of the occurrence of the abnormal state is output from the speaker, when the volume is turned down and the volume is operated low, the volume of the production sound and the notification sound are transmitted. There is a problem in that the volume is reduced and it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to make it difficult for a salesclerk in the hall to notice the occurrence of an abnormal state due to the notification sound even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced. It is to provide a game machine capable of preventing such a situation.

  The following are effective solutions for achieving the above object. The operation and the like will be described as needed. Further, for ease of understanding, the configurations and the like corresponding to the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
A plurality of voice output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and an effect sound due to the progress of the game,
Production display means,
First volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Production control means for controlling the voice output means and the production display means based on the progress of production,
A gaming machine comprising: a second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound according to the operation by operating the first volume adjustment means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second sound volume adjusting means is operated to change the sound volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjusting control means in response to the operation. Control means,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying an abnormal state for the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period without depending on the sound volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means,
When the abnormality notification period occurs during the game, the notification sound is output at a volume that does not depend on the volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means, and is output before the abnormality notification period occurs. The volume of the effect sound is changed to mute, and while the effect sound is changed to mute, the effect sound is continued to proceed, and when the abnormality notification period ends, the notification sound output is changed. When the output is stopped and the abnormality notification period is generated, the volume of the effect sound that is changed to mute is set according to the operation on the second volume adjusting means before the abnormality notification period is generated. Production sound progress continuation control means for restoring and setting the volume changed by the change control means,
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
The effect sound volume adjustment control means changes and sets the volume of the effect sound immediately when the first volume adjustment means is operated,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
The effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the volume of the effect sound to a low level according to the operation of the first sound volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means responds to the operation of the second sound volume adjustment means. In the state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means is being reduced, a volume higher than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
The effect control means,
During the abnormality notification period, a notification sound can be output from the voice output means and the effect display means can perform notification display.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormal state due to the notification sound.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a plan view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the upper decoration unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and saw the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and showed the handle apparatus in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing a relation among a payout passage, a payout motor, and a payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the sphere in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen after. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko game machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like as viewed from the front. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 92 taken in the vertical direction. It is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 as disassembled and seen from the front. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, and a CR unit and a frequency display board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a liquid crystal and a sound controller with a sound source built-in VDP and its periphery. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 104 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 103. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input / output circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a firing control input circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of the predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a sub liquid crystal drive substrate. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device, and (b) is the brightness adjustment of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram showing variations in brightness adjustment, and FIG. 7D is a diagram showing the range of the rotation angle of the brightness adjustment volume with respect to the range of brightness variations of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device during new use and reuse. It is a schematic diagram showing. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 120 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 120 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 126. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 127. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball removal switch operation judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze operation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error release switch operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of the payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from the CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation detection switch history creation processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches, which is caused by clockwise rotation of a dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switches, which is caused by the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. (A) is a list showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches according to the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in the rotation operation unit, and (B) is associated with the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part. It is a list diagram showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 6 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is explanatory drawing (range approached to the maximum value side) which shows operation | movement of an initial value update type counter. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of an initial value updating type counter (a range closer to the minimum value side). It is the figure which shows one example of production. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal, and (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the connection recovery process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal. . LOCKN signal detection history information The number of times it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input each time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN-HIST. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the connection failure judging processing in the case of judging whether (cumulative number) has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. (A) shows that the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination processing is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a connection failure determination process for determining whether or not there is, and (b) is a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that a LOCKN signal is input based on LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing in the case where it is determined whether or not a LOCKN signal is continuously input each time the connection failure determination processing is executed. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of an embodiment different from the example of Drawing 20 grade from the left front.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the rear side, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame forming the pachinko gaming machine, It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a game board and a door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable to open the front side. A box-frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side into which game balls as a game medium are driven, and the front surfaces of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played. It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably and axially supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko gaming machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 respectively extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and the lateral width in each of the left and right directions. Are approximately the same as each other, and the vertical dimension in the vertical direction is slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the main frame 3 and the door frame 5. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and two lower plates 302 are arranged on the upper and lower sides. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hit ball strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is impossible to insert a hand or the like into a game ball, an obstacle nail, various winning holes, an accessory, etc. in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a bar body 1250 is provided so as to be closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. The side frame plates 12 and 13 are provided with four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, respectively. It is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting 13 pieces. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and vertically penetrate through substantially the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engagement notch 15 is provided that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity penetrating in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity. In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer side surfaces and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and extending in the opposite direction to the vertical piece 18. The upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15. In the present embodiment, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left and right. In addition to being formed in an asymmetrical shape, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in bilaterally symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

  In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state in which the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to each other. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 is disposed on the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and is fixed to a lower inner predetermined position of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support metal member 20. A supporting metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 is provided. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the supporting hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 57) of an upper shaft support member 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped supporting protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like protrusion protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the supporting protrusion 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 59 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 82) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably attached and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and is rotated with respect to the support projecting piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is movably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a to the left is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 has a structure in which the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the distal end side of the stopper portion 27a is formed. Is facing the stop hanging part 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging part 20f, and it is not in contact). In a certain normal shaft support state, the center of each of the shaft support pin 633 and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located at the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the supporting hook hole 20c formed by bending is slanted. They are in a state of facing each other with a shift in the direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633, which supports the heavy body frame 3, is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operating portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the action pin F is applied to the arcuate tip surface 27d in the direction in which the pivot pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the action force F is A component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. State of being sandwiched between the inner surface of one side To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) away from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of being further disengaged, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

  Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock member 27 is locked. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. I'm confirming.

  The operation of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivotal support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivotal support fitting 644 (see FIG. 57) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 to be pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16 (C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 which form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum). Since it is an extruded material of (alloy), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility lined up in the game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such a work is performed by driving nails on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily installed on the existing pachinko island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form the wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 57 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large at the same time that the can be attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fastened in close contact with the inner member and the connecting member 14 is fastened with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 engaged with each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device ( For example, it can be attached in close contact with an adjacent ball lending machine or CR unit).

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the back.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a gaming window 101 in which the outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and the inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The frame base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery, an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. There.

  Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating through the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[3-1. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  As shown in the drawing, the door frame base unit 100 has a game frame 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a lower end of the game window 101 on the left and right outside of the front side of the door frame base body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 to be mounted and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is mounted on the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110, are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower portion of the game window 101 with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction (open side) in rear view. ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. Handle relay terminal plate 192 that relays the connection between the control relay board 4100 and the main control board 4100, and a hand that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192. The door frame base is arranged on the opposite side of the relay terminal board cover 193 and the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal board 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side) in rear view). A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 attached to the rear surface of the main body and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are provided.

  The overall rigidity of the door frame base unit 100 is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and peripheral controls provided in the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is connected to the board 4140 and amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish units 300, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 are provided. The wiring for connecting the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, and the like is a frame decoration drive amplifier. When viewed from the rear of the board 194, they are collectively bundled at the right side (shaft support side) position and then extended backward to be connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically elongated inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape. The gaming window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as that of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than a conventional pachinko game machine can be easily formed. You can do it.

  In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feeding unit 580 for mounting and fixing. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball mounting opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is disposed in the lower right corner portion in front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and the handle mounting portion. Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a 14 cylinder extending short toward the front by the upper is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in a rear view. Located on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 for mounting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the rear side left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 closer to the center than the speaker mounting section 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward from the disposition and for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side on the rear side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the unit 590 can abut, and the glass unit locking member 190 protruding rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. Further comprises a four engaging member mounting portion 110b for rotatably supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from a lower side thereof by a predetermined amount, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even if an attempt is made, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an enhanced crime prevention function. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the side speaker 130, the handle bracket 140, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 described later are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 are omitted. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is hidden, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, the upper bracket 120 is designed such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and when the door frame 5 is assembled, the upper decoration unit 280 can be supported from above. It is like this.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from a center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). The position is fixed at an angle of 0.5 m) so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 most efficiently. In addition, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged in a position separated from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high sense of stereo.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The ridge 143 is provided with a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500, which is supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state, is also inclined in the same manner.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 that is bent rearward and extends in the vertical direction at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is provided so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

  The shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, so that If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased, and The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape. Can be prevented from being inserted, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side part thereof has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. The contact recessed portion 181 is formed, and the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recessed portion 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the right side (the pivotal support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear side longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, a crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention projection 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The inner member 1110 of the component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the ball guide path formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of a ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw at the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating. Note that, of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view has no ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in rear view is provided with an operation piece 190c extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and different from the locking piece 190b. There is. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation piece 190c is covered on the rear side by the security cover 180, so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated with the security cover 180 attached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the glass unit 590 from being easily removed by rotating the glass unit locking member 190.

  The firing cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 and the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle relay terminal board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[3-2. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. 27A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 27B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembled and seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. The side upper cover 208, the side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decoration frame 202 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. And are equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration. A substrate 214, and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 that is disposed below the substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; The right side upper decorative board cover 218 which covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the right side which covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 It is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 arranged in an upper left portion in a front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub-lens 228 attached from inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208 are provided. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 is arranged, and the LED 214c is adapted to emit light.

  In this right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a non-translucent member, and a side decoration. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decoration lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decoration unit 200 are translucent members. And the side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub-lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lenses 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front surfaces of the side inner lenses 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, the decoration boards 214, 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The inner frame 202a and the inner frame 202a are arranged at positions separated from the inner frame 202a to the outside and are linear along the side surface outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 202b that is formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper edge of 202a, an upper frame 202c that connects the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and lower ends of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a. The inner frame is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the lower frame 202d that connects the edges and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting the outer frame 202b 02a.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 202b above the linearly vertically extending portion is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side projects forward. Further, the partition wall frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b projects most forward. The partition wall frame 202f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f, and each of the divided portions is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the partition frame 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light-emission decoration opening 202g so that the respective light-emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the figure, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arcuately extending upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 204, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 204 through the opening 204a to the vicinity of its front end. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 206a that can project. The tip of the light guide portion 206a is formed in a polyhedron shape, and by inserting the light guide portion 206a into the opening portion 204a of the side upper decoration member 204, it is possible to make it look like a jewel is being fitted into the opening portion 204a. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decoration lens 206 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decoration member 204. In addition to this, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper side surface and the right side surface (in a front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 has a mounting step portion 208a which is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end faces. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notch portions 208b arranged vertically are formed, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached inside through these notch portions 208b can be seen to the front side. Has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only in this portion.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along with the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. The peripheral lens part 210a and the radiation lens part 210b to be inserted into the slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. The storage step portion 210c is formed. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, etc., which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 210c. The side lens 210 also includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the housing step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the circumferential lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the circumferential lens portion 210a has an uneven plate thickness. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens section 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 210a to have a characteristic appearance that is glittering.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed. The main body portion 212a having a recessed rear surface is continuous with the rear end of the main body portion 212a and projects further forward than the main body portion 212a, and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). And a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed such that the front surface of the main body 212a is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. Since the thickness of the main body 212a is not uniform, the light transmitted through the main body 212a is irregularly refracted.

  By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be doubly refracted and the shape of the object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. Further, due to irregular refraction and irregular reflection due to a polyhedron shape, the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made to have a glittering appearance, and the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

  The right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 (the circumference of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at the positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b) have relatively small irradiation angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub-lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in the present embodiment.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a sound in the mid-high range, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 224 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper rear side of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 is not seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in a front view. Has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and it can be a noise to other pachinko gaming machines. It's becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emission decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed in the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, light is diffusely refracted in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, and thus it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 or the upper speaker cover 226. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 can be made similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a.

[3-3. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it.

  As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. The outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is different from the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side and the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. The side upper cover 248, the side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248, and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. And are equipped with.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the substantially center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decoration substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration substrate 256. It is attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in an upper right portion of the side decoration frame 242 in a front view, and an upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to a rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member, and the side decoration. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decoration member 244. Also, the side upper decoration lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although not shown in detail, the rear surfaces of the substantially transparent side lenses 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front surfaces of the side inner lenses 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed into a polyhedron shape. , Is capable of irregularly refracting light. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are games. It cannot be clearly seen from the person's side. Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game window 101. The inner frame 242a and the inner frame 242a are arranged at positions separated from the inner frame 242a to the outside, and are linear along the side surface outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part, and the following upper part is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper edge of 242a, an upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and lower ends of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a. The inner frame is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the lower frame 242d that connects the edges and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 42a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is linearly formed at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, while the front end is vertically movable. Are formed in an arc shape so that both ends thereof project forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion of the outer frame 242b above the linearly extending vertically is formed in an arcuate shape that is also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper edge side projects forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b projects most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation radially extending from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 has a configuration in which a space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f, and each of the divided portions is divided. Is an emission decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light-emission decoration opening 242g so that the respective light-emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the figure, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arcuately extending upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decoration member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decoration lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decoration member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decoration member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 246a that can project. The tip of the light guide portion 246a is formed in a polyhedron shape, and by inserting the light guide portion 246a into the opening portion 244a of the side upper decoration member 244, it is possible to make the opening portion 244a look like a jewel is being fitted. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 can be emitted forward (on the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. At the same time, the tip of the light guide 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in a front view) that are substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along with the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step portion 248a that is open downward and is recessed rearward so that the side upper decoration member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front surface. Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the side upper decorative members 244 and the like are formed on the end faces. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b on its outer side surface (left side surface when viewed from the front) that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape that is substantially along with the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. The peripheral lens part 250a and the radiation lens part 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emission decoration opening 242g that contacts the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is a storage step portion 250c. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are housed in the housing step 250c. The side lens 250 also includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a of the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges toward the front so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although not shown in detail, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens section 250a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the peripheral lens section 250a has a non-uniform plate thickness. As a result, the light passing through the peripheral lens section 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a characteristic appearance with a glitter.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 250, and as shown in the figure, corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed. Corresponding to the main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface and the emission lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) which is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward of the main body portion 252a. And a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b arranged at the above position. The body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface of the body portion 252 a is a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Although not shown in detail, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a polyhedral shape with a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. Since the plate portion of the main body portion 252a has a non-uniform thickness, light passing through the main body portion 252a is irregularly refracted.

  By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens section 250a and the main body section 252a can be double irregularly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. Almost unrecognizable. In addition, the irregular reflection and the polyhedral diffuse reflection cause the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) to have a glittering appearance and a strange and unclear perspective.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and the light emitting decorative opening 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and are used as slits 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) of the side decoration frame 242. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens section 250b) are those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is adapted to be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in a front view. Has become.

  The left upper speaker 262 is adapted to be emitted from the upper portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the player below by the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, which causes noise to other pachinko gaming machines. It's becoming difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens section 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body section 252a of the side inner lens 252. Is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is nonuniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted.

  An upper speaker cover 266 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emission decoration opening 242g that is in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is uneven, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted. Therefore, light is irregularly refracted in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. The outer appearance of the side lens 250 can be the same as that of the peripheral lens portion 250a.

[3-4. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  The upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has a generally outer isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and a central opening 281a that greatly penetrates the center and both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decoration member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the center opening 281a, and a rear side inside the center opening 281a of the front decoration member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from above, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 from the rear side, and the outer shape in front view are The central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are formed in a shape similar to that of the front decoration member 281. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to be sandwiched by the decorative member 281; A board cover 287 is attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is bent backward so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decoration member 281, extends rearward, and has a front end upper portion supported by the front decoration member 281 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. A lower surface decoration member 288 having a pair of lower opening portions 288a penetrating toward each other, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening portion 288a of the lower surface decoration member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decoration member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Are provided. In this embodiment, the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288 are provided with plating layers having metallic luster on their surfaces. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289, and the central lens 282 and the side lens The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, in the present embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  In the front decoration member 281 in the upper decoration unit 280, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is such that the center upper end is a side extending left and right, the center lower end is a vertex, and each side is extending in a gentle arc shape in a front view. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape, and has three protrusions that extend into the central opening 281a from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end apex. Further, the front decoration member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and by this streaking, the front decoration member 281 is cut from the central opening 281a. The blade is formed in a shape that extends, and the side opening 281b is formed so as to follow the line carving.

  The outer shape of the central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 is substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and the front lens is bulged forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 is made of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening portion 281a of the front decoration member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that has been cut with a trillian, and the front decoration member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is made of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of them are formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been done. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 similarly to the inner lens 283, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniformed by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is capable of emitting light.

  It should be noted that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of white turbidity due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. Has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a contour that substantially follows the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decoration member 281 and extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening inclines obliquely downward and the rear end is closed. Is inclined diagonally upward, a rear end that is disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a and is closed is located at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 and penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b of the main body member 285 have a shape recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side direction.

  Further, the lower surface decoration member 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker cover 226 is close to that of the upper end frames 202c and 242c, and the end portions of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 near the upper end frames 202c and 242c are mounted and fixed. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, the lower lens 289 is supplied with light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 through the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[3-5. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Is to be placed between. The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk-like shape and a plurality of holes that are curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the lower plate of the plate unit 300 that is arranged below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to the lower plate cover 328 of the plate unit 300 described later. The side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-6. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the plate unit 300 includes a plate unit base 310 which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and which extends in the left-right direction, and a substantially central front surface of the plate unit base 310. The upper plate body 312 is fixed to the upper plate and the rear plate are opened, and the left side (shaft support side) in the front view largely bulges forward, and when the outer periphery of the upper part of the upper plate body 312 is covered, the front end is left and right in front view. A front part of the upper plate having a curved upper plate 314 whose center is projected forward, and a plurality of openings 316a which are attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate panel 314 and penetrate vertically. A left and right side having a decorative member 316 and a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted in the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on the opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. The upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 are arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light from the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 is arranged between them. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  Further, in the dish unit 300, the lower side of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 to open the upper and the rear, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view and the front end extends to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. A cover 328, a plate side middle cover 330 having openings 330a arranged on both left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330. A dish side middle cover lens 332 that is fitted in from the dish side middle cover 330, and a dish side outer cover 334 that is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 and extends in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. In addition, the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof, the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side when viewed from the front.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate body 312 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and the lower plate body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 attached to the lower surface and the plate unit base 310 are attached to the upper left side in a front view and are installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a ball rental unit 360 for operating a CR unit (not shown).

  The dish unit 300 constitutes the upper dish 301 capable of storing the game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction below the opening 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) near the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and is fitted to the lower plate body 324 and the rear ends of the lower plate top plates 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in the lower part to the right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes larger toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front side of the upper dish ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper dish 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540. , It becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, and thus the paid out game ball is brought into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and the roll is performed. The moving direction changes, and the guide recess 310j is guided so as to roll to the right when viewed from the front, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Becomes As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven, and thereby reducing the interest in the game, and increasing the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

  The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply is performed by the widened portion 310k. The front end of the mouth 310g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. In the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and are supplied to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that is in contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed), so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. An operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decorative attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish main body 312, is provided.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 which are attached to the lower surface. An opening and a notch are formed to penetrate in the direction, and the operation unit mounting portion 314c is formed with an opening through which a wiring cable connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can pass. ..

  The upper plate front part decoration member 316 has a shape that extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a light guide part of the upper plate upper lens 318 from below into a plurality of openings 316a. 318a is adapted to be fitted, and the upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 and the decorative plate mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. The light from the above can be sufficiently diffused, and the entire upper plate upper lens 318 can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated. As shown in the drawing, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a has the same shape. By fitting the light guide portion 318a into a shape, the appearance is as if a pair-shaped cut jewel was fitted into the opening 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316. ..

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that is fan-shaped in the front view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 324a is formed to have the lowest center, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and at the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower dish cover 328 has an outer shape in a front view that bulges downward and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a is the same as the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on both left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along the lower side edge of the lower dish cover 328 from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending in the width and extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the dish side middle cover 330 on the right side (open side) in front view, a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near the outer end (right side end) thereof. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is like this. Further, a part of the lower side of the lower dish main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the dish side middle cover 330.

  The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in a front view, and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 in a front view, and is opened rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In the present embodiment, a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right side (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the dish side outer cover 334 and the dish side middle cover 330 cover the lower side of the lower dish body 324 excluding the central portion.

  The upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is provided with an upper plate ball removing button 341 that is attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314 so as to be capable of moving forward and backward, and an operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. And the operation piece 342 which is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310, and the up and down movement of the operation piece 342 slides up and down to move the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removing slider 343, which is provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and includes the contact piece 343a that contacts the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 can be slid vertically. An upper dish ball removing base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl ball removing base 344 of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and, at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 39), and a ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 38 and FIG. 38). 40), and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, with the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. At the same time, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

  In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 go from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball discharge port 581b to the ball discharge channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

  Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343, which is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are provided. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball punching mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball punching base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330c of the dish side middle covers 330 arranged below the lower dish body 324 on the left and right in a front view. , A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 that is pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and that can open and close the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324, and the lower plate that rotates the opening / closing shutter 352. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially match the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the up-down direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower dish ball removing slider 353. , The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. You can do it.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged below the lower center of the lower dish cover 328 of the dish unit 300 in the left-right direction, and is located between the left and right dish side middle covers 330. The surface shape is smoothly continuous with the surface shapes of the lower dish cover 328 and the dish side middle cover 330.

  In addition, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

  This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides rearward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring.

  Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355 to hold the slide. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. It is held in a state of being matched with the extraction hole 3324b, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the lower dish is removed. The ball-sliding slider 353 is slidable, and the opening / closing shutter 352 is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b by the coil spring. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slider 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It returns to the position of the closed state that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

  It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining number display 365c can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display unit 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, and the remaining count display 365c are mounted on the count display plate 365, and the count display plate 365 is attached inside the ball rental unit 360. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the loan will be returned. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and locks and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

[3-7. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of hitting the game ball with respect to the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass therethrough. And a lower cover 424 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the drive gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is set to the value 2. Therefore, the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is When driven twice, the driven gear 410 meshing with the drive gear 412 rotates once. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15 ° in one step and 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio has a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation portion 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. The dial decoration board 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b and the inner cylinder part 401a of the dial operation part 401 can pass and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface at a position corresponding to the ring of the dial operation part 401. And fixed to the lower side of the base member 420, A pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a push detection switch 432c for detecting the operation of the push operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the push operation unit 405. , Are provided.

  The dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and a surface extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. Has a ring-shaped top plate portion 401b provided with a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth unevenness), and extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape. An outer cylinder part 401c shorter than the delivery inner cylinder part 401a and a flange part 401d extending outward from the lower end of the outer cylinder part 401c in an annular shape are mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a connecting locking portion (see FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner tubular portion 401a, and the connecting locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operating portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other. Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later, and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

  As shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frustoconical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frustoconical shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower portion of the outer circumference and projecting outward at the lower end in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with the locking projection 416g (see FIG. 45 and FIG. 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating inside the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of a gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

  Further, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressing detection switch 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection switch 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a circular ring-shaped sliding surface that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detection pieces 410c and 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this embodiment, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 alternately rotates the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in the normal rotation direction and the reverse rotation direction in small increments, thereby rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise and counterclockwise. Since rotation and rotation can be alternately repeated in small steps, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, it is possible to click the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to add a feeling.

  Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416g (locking projection 416g formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 45 and 46) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). And a rotation detection switch attached to the button decoration board 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. 32a, 432b can pass through, an opening 416e through which the press detection switch 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 penetrates the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction and faces from the upper side, and from the lower surface to the lower side. And a pair of substrate holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extension button decoration substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and locks the button. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated conical bottom surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation unit holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b, and which vertically extends. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, Is equipped with. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from the outside of the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for protruding the dial decoration board 430 to be mounted. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes, etc. at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. This top cover 422 has a direction (left-right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend long, and is provided with engaging claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) in the short axis direction (the front-back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly in a claw-like engagement. It is provided with a piece 422c. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from slipping upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  In the upper cover 422, with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation portion 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, the dial operation portion 401 is attached from below to the opening 422a. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so that the passage can be made, it is possible to prevent the dial operation portion 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom portion. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (the left and right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claw 422b with.

  As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates through the center in the vertical direction and allows the dial operation portion 401 (excluding the collar portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. The tray unit 300 includes a fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420. .

  The operation unit 400 is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, in the state where it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, The lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so as to be slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the operation unit 400 is pressed. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when hitting or hitting, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In this operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The structure is such that the surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and each rotation. It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment will be described later in detail, it is possible to rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. There is. Further, the operation unit 400 causes the dial operation unit 401 to rotate in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation of rotating it in reverse.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button operation is performed. Since the cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is not applied to the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the dial operation section 401 side through the press operation section 405 (operation unit 400) so as not to be easily broken.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414 is wiggled in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By alternately repeating the rotation for forward rotation and the rotation for reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and plays a game. You can entertain the production.

  Next, a description will be given of dial excitation control capable of vibrating the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation of rotating it in reverse. As described above, the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15 ° in 1 step and 360 ° in 24 steps. Therefore, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates by 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates by 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410, and the reduction ratio has a value of 2. As a result, the dial operation portion 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  By rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward by one step and then rotating it in the reverse direction for one step, the rotation for normal rotation and the rotation for reverse rotation in such one step are alternately repeated, and the dial operation unit 401 Can be rotated little by little in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions to create a state in which the dial operation unit 401 is as if it were vibrating. Since the surface of the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a design having smooth unevenness, the dial operation portion 401 can be rotated little by little in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. When the player's finger or palm touches the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation unit 401, the fingers and palm are moved by the smooth unevenness on the surface of the top plate portion 401b so that vibration is applied to the game. It is also possible to make people feel it.

  The dial excitation control for alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward by one step and the rotation for the reverse rotation is specifically, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. See 100). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related commands). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc. (see FIG. 120) classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related is received, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later based on the received command. In the unit steady process (see step S1009 to step S1038 in FIG. 145), the dial vibration is performed according to the schedule data for alternately repeating the rotation for normally rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 for one step and the rotation for the reverse rotation. Take control. The dial vibration control schedule data defines the start time and the end time of the dial vibration control, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs dial excitation control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147) described later.

  Next, a rotation direction change control that can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction will be described. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is connected to the driven gear 410, and the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged in a row at regular intervals on the driven gear 410 are detected by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The rotation direction is detected based on the detected pattern.

  The rotation direction change control changes the rotation direction when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops while the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate counterclockwise or when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise, the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 When the rotation is stopped, the rotation direction is changed and the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate clockwise. When the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the rotation of the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 is also stopped. Therefore, the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410 is stopped. Also, the rotation of the output shaft is stopped, and the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, goes out of synchronization. As described above, in the present embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out by the player's will. Therefore, the player touches the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or a palm. It is possible to forcibly stop the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 or change the rotation direction.

  Specifically, this is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related commands). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc. (see FIG. 120) classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related is received, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later based on the received command. In the part steady process (see step S1009 to step S1038 in FIG. 145), the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate normally and reversely. The schedule data of this rotation direction change control defines the rotation start timing and rotation end timing of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in advance. Multiple items are stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 150) executed as one process in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (see step S1108 in FIG. 147) described later. From the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST, is the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step). , Whether it is rotating in the clockwise direction or in the counterclockwise direction, the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is performed (step S1104 in FIG. 147). Refer to), and control the turning direction according to the schedule data.

  For example, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in the state of being rotated, the rotation direction change control is performed in accordance with the schedule data for continuously rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction, while the state of the dial operation unit 401 being stopped (in other words, When it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating counterclockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. .

  Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is currently rotated counterclockwise, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. When it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is in a rotating state, the rotation direction change control is continuously performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise, while the dial operation unit 401 is in the stopped state ( In other words, if it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating clockwise, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise. To do.

  As described above, in both the dial excitation control and the rotation direction change control described above, the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is normally or reversely rotated. Is executed when an external factor such as a case where the peripheral control MPU4150a is actually rotating in the opposite direction to the intended direction or when the peripheral control MPU4150a is stopped, whereas the former dial vibration control is performed. Is completely different in that a period during which the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is normally or reversely rotated is preset and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

  Further, in the rotation direction change control, when it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is rapidly changed to the reverse rotation direction, whereas the dial vibration control is performed. Since there is a difference in vibrating the dial operation unit 401, in the rotation direction change control, the same sense of effect as the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial excitation control is obtained. It can be created using the dial operation unit 401.

  Next, the click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotating operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. Since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor as described above, it is possible to generate static torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining the energized state (excitation state) of a specific phase of the stepping motor. You can Here, in the present embodiment, the first stationary torque generation state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific one phase to generate the stationary torque, and the excitation state is maintained in the specific two phases to maintain the stationary state. A mechanism for creating a second stationary torque generation state in which torque is generated is adopted.

  In the first stationary torque generation state, when the dial operation portion 401 is rotated beyond the stationary torque in this state, rotation of the dial operation portion 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When it is transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses step and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates in steps of 15 °, and this stepless step and rotating operation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. . Even in the second stationary torque generation state, when the dial operating portion 401 is rotated beyond the stationary torque in this state, rotation of the dial operating portion 401 is driven by the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412 is fixed to the dial drive. When it is transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft loses step and rotates step by step, that is, it rotates in steps of 15 °, and this stepless step and rotating operation is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. .

  In the second static torque generation state, since the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases, it is 2 for the first static torque generation state that is maintained for the specific one phase. Double static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state is transmitted twice as much as the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state.

  The stepping motor is usually controlled so as to prevent out-of-step so as not to become out of control, but in the present embodiment, the stepping motor is actively controlled to out-of-step, so that the dial operation unit is controlled. It is possible to obtain a click feeling in the rotating operation of 401, and by generating the click feeling in two stages, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be felt lightly. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second stationary torque generation state can be made heavy.

  The click generation control capable of giving a click feeling to the rotating operation of the dial operation unit 401 is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related commands). When a special figure 2 tuning effect start command or the like (see FIG. 120) that is classified as related to special figure 2 tuning effect is received (see FIG. 120), the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later is performed based on the received command. In the unit steady process (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 145), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The schedule data for this click generation control defines the timing for generating the stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 and the timing for stopping it. The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). Are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs click generation control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147).

  As described above, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. It is completely different in that it is one. In addition, in the click generation control, there is a click feeling when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, whereas in the rotation direction change control, the rotation direction is changed by hindering (blocking) the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Since it is completely different in that it makes a sudden change to the reverse rotation direction, in the click generation control, the same dial operation as the effect of the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction change control is produced. It can be created using the unit 401.

  Here, the torque-free control in which static torque is not applied to the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, all phases of the dial drive motor 414 are in the non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, a load or click feeling that hinders the operation is not generated at all.

  The effect using the torque-free control will be briefly described. For example, an effect screen selected by operating the dial operation unit 401 and rotating the dial operation unit 401 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 95). At the same time, the click generation control described above imparts a click feeling to the dial operation unit 401, and when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, suddenly , The state in which the click generation control is stopped and the torque becomes free, that is, the state shifts to the torque free control, and it can be used for the effect that the player selects an effect screen that is not intended (scooping his foot). In other words, in the click generation control, the stationary torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque-free control, the generated stationary torque is forcibly released and the player's finger or Since the static torque, which is the load applied to the palm of the palm from the dial operation unit 401, can be suddenly removed, the forcible release of the static torque causes the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 as a slip feeling to cause a player's finger or palm. Will be given to.

  As described above, the present embodiment is based on a completely new idea of using the stepping motor as a man-machine interface in addition to the idea of driving the movable body by using the stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs the operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (see step S1108 in FIG. 147). A state in which the dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 150) executed as one process. The player knows whether it is rotating in the clockwise direction or in the counterclockwise direction, so that the player has no relation to the progress of the production (for example, the production Linked to operate dial operation unit 401 (effects other than the effect that prompts the operation, etc.) It has to be able to view. Accordingly, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm, it rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise, Alternatively, a behavior of rotating counterclockwise is imparted to rotate the dial operation unit 401 against the rotation direction of the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 when it recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's finger or palm irrespective of the progress of the effect, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. The rotation behavior imparting control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the wheel clockwise or counterclockwise. The schedule data of the rotation behavior imparting control defines the rotation direction and the rotation speed of rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). Plural items are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the rotational behavior imparting control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 147).

  In this way, when the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm irrespective of the progress of the effect, the dial drive motor 414 of the peripheral drive circuit 414 is operated. Since the behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401 by the rotation of the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts to move. In other words, when the player performs a meaningless operation that has nothing to do with the effect on the dial operation unit 401, the pachinko gaming machine 1 responds to this and a behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401. The player behaves as if he / she should be careful not to perform a meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401. Such a behavior by the dial operation unit 401 can give the player an impression as if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an intention. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property with the operation member.

[3-8. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame which is disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is mounted on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape; A rotating handle body front 506 that is fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and is rotatable integrally with the rotating handle body rear 504, and is disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502, and the handle base 502 In cooperation with the rotating handle body front 506 and rotating A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing part 510a at the rear end that is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side, and the bearing part of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted and rotatable with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted with the front surface of the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle base 502 so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 Fixed to the switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a through which the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 can pass, the touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member 514, and the touch switch 516 are the switch support member 514's A fire stop switch 518 mounted on the rear surface at a different position, and a switch A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported by a support member 514 and that operates a firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 And a handle return spring 522 for urging the handle to return to the position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506. Further, the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body 504 are rotated from the original rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view to the limit rotation position (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view). Move.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 has a hemispherical rounded bulge on the front end side and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. In addition, three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotating shaft of the rotary handle main body 506 is formed, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. The mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, whereby the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is regulated.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is engaged with the switch support member 514. The handle return spring 522 causes the rotary handle body 504 to rotate. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 is adapted to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to the door frame 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 (handle device 500) are rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member 510. It will be. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball striking device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. , The rotation angle of the rotation handle bodies 504, 506, that is, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launching intensity according to the rotation position of the rotation handle bodies 504, 506.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch switch 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the rotating handle bodies 504 and 506. It is like this. Then, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate while the touch switch 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation, and the game ball. You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like this. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

  The handle device 500 electrically detects the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the potentiometer 512, and then based on the detection of the rotational position from the potentiometer 512, the firing control unit 4120 rotationally drives the firing solenoid 654. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed when the door frame 5 is closed, as in the conventional pachinko game machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism that is linked to each other and is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the joint can be achieved. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the unit, and the interest of the player is reduced due to the defect of the game ball being hit. And it is capable to suppress.

[3-9. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 50 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hitting ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 having an opening on the front side and having a plurality of flow paths for gaming balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first ball entrance. The first sphere passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view, the second sphere entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first sphere entrance 542a, and Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c which extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is opened upward, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 passes the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b and the first ball outlet 544a. The upper plate 301 can be supplied through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is pivotally supported on the cover base 542 so as to be swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. The swinging member 548, a full switch 550 that detects swinging of the swinging member 548, and a spring 552 that biases the swinging member 548 in a direction in which the full swinging switch 550 does not detect the swinging member 548. ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542 and an upper end rotatable leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank switch 550. . That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546 are full.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and further, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the normal passage 773 in the upstream of is also filled up, the game balls start to flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 72), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the game space in which the accommodation space 546 is stored is full, the game ball from the award ball unit 700 in the payout control board 4110. The payout is stopped and the player is notified to expel the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection switch 548a is not detected by the full tank switch 550. As a result of detection, the payout of gaming balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[3-10. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 51B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case removed. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball sending opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball hitting launcher 650, a rear cover 582, and a front cover. A partition portion 583a pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removing member 583 and the game balls on the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one, and the shaft extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 is provided. A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the ball feeding member 584 and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Each is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball sending member 584 and a partitioning portion 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-back direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the axis of rotation. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball hitting launching device 650, and at the same time, the game entered from the entrance 581a onto the partition 583a. The blocking section 584a blocks the movement of the ball toward the ball holding section 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side, and remains in the state of staying on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically of the ball feeding operation rod 586. And a ball feeding crank 587 for rotating the ball feeding member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 587 is provided with an engaging portion 587a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feeding operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 52) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG. In this embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feeding unit 580 causes the ball feeding member 584 to rotate by transmitting the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 which moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 586 and the ball feeding crank 587. It can be moved. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the slewing ball support member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is adapted to receive a moment such that the weight 583d rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, but projects forward. The operating rod 583c comes into contact with the upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. Then, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a to contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and enters the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b into the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition part 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

[3-11. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically elongated octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction on the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Locking piece 592b.

  In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIGS. 23, 26, etc.).

  In this way, the door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having an oblong elliptical shape. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. The handle device 500 of FIG. The door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 sandwiched therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. The exterior has a continuous continuous tinge.

  In addition, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like included in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the game window 101. Also, the lower plate cover 328 can be illuminated and decorated with any luminescent color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs are mounted on the rear side of the emission lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens sections 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250, and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b. If the light emitting modes and the light emitting pattern are the same (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. By doing so, it is possible to make a light-emitting decoration that is discontinuous in the circumferential direction, and if the light-emitting modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they radiate radially with the center of the game window 101 as the center. It can be made to be a light-emitting decoration and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of an aluminum alloy by die casting, and the cover body 426 causes the base member 420 of the dish unit 300 to move. Since it is hung from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operating portion 401 or the pressing operating portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and the base member 420 is lowered. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424, the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated, and the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged. You can do it.

  Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 405 is inserted in the annular dial operation portion 401, and even if the player or the like strongly hits the pressing operation portion 405, the dial operation portion 401 is also included. Since it is struck by the ball, the impact that is struck by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the impact from being concentrated and prevent damage. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly project from below from the upper surface. The impact of hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410, and when the operation portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the opening 420a made of metal. Since the base member 420 can be contacted with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced, and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Moreover, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged. By replacing the unit 400, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from decreasing.

[3-12. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the emission lens parts 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed by the non-translucent (in this embodiment, a plating layer is provided on the surface) side decoration frames 202 and 242. It is in a state where the outer circumference is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250, and the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged relative to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although not shown in detail in the main body 212a, 252a of the side inner lens 212, 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface of the main body 212a, 252a, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254 arranged on the rear side are arranged. , 256 can diffuse the light.

  The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b. In this embodiment, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens sections 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper part). The normal brightness is lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decoration substrate 286 in the decoration unit 280. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In the present embodiment, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk). It is made white by printing), white painting, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b to the player side by the substrate. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. Is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape at the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. . As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the inner lens 283 passes through the transparent central lens 282. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 looks deep and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283 cannot be seen from the player side.

  On the upper decoration substrate 286 of the upper decoration unit 280, a plurality (six in this embodiment) of LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are arranged. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this embodiment, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, one for the left lens and one for the left lens) are provided on the rear side. In this embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200, 240. The front decorative member 316 is arranged in a row in a state of being exposed through the opening 316a, and when viewed from the front, as shown in the drawing, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper lens 318 form the outside of the lower side of the game window 101. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide 318a is arranged. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) of the upper dish upper lens 318 corresponding to the light guide portion 318a, and diffuses or refracts light. Therefore, like the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guiding portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is provided with a deepness and a glittering brilliance. The light portion 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 disposed on the lower side from being seen from the player side through the light guide portion 318a.

  On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality (six in the present embodiment, respectively) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In the present embodiment, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-intensity white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214a, 216a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer circumference above the lower side of the game window 101. , 254a, 256a are a first ring-shaped group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 53 and 54) close to the game window 101, and a second ring-shaped group 103 arranged outside the first ring-shaped group 102 (FIG. 53). And within the range of the crosshatch in FIG. 54), by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, a plurality of substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 ( In the present embodiment, two) light emission decoration can be performed. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 102 and the LED 214b. It is a radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 53 and 54) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two annular groups 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side of the right side decoration unit 200 is defined as the upper right side group 105, and by appropriately emitting the LED 214c, one of the upper right side of the door frame 5 is removed. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101, the upper center that lights up and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is defined as a group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and also serves as a reference point for the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. Further, the LEDs 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that causes both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106 to emit light. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 286b of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 are illuminated and decorated, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper portion). It is possible to decorate with V-shaped light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a is a lower group 108 that light-embellishes the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be illuminated and decorated, and also the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. , 216a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 can be illuminated in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the center of the upper side of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be informed.

  The light emission decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong, according to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 have 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

  Further, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a, 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems, 108a to 108d, three from the right side in front view. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401, which are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, as a set, and the left and right 109a and front and rear 109a. 109b is divided into two systems and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission, and in actual light emission control, 3 It doubles to 84 lines. Further, the LEDs 286b, 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a, 109b to which the LEDs 286b, 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each system, and the number of systems is doubled in the actual light emission control to eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) so that the game window 101 is spread outward. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4, the front unit 2000, etc., the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. With the LED of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately causing each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d to emit light. Such a light emitting effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 extends along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to produce a moving light effect. In the present embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect of radially emitting light around the game window 101 is performed, and at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, it is possible to perform a light emission effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting / blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light. It is possible to give a luminous effect by adding an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the radial lens units 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, by causing each of the systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106 to emit light at the same time, the entire central lens 282 emits light, or by causing each of the systems 106a to 106c to sequentially emit light, the light rotates in the central lens 282. It is possible to perform various luminous effects. Also, by making the upper center side group 107 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a certain variation game). State, time saving game state, probability variation time saving game state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate the player with light from above the player's head so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-intensity LED 286b. .

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the front edge of the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405. Further, by appropriately illuminating the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. You can Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108. , 109, or each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, it is possible to perform a light emission effect with different gradations of light emission color, brightness, etc. It is possible to produce a light-emitting effect with rich expressions.

  Thus, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are arranged in the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101. And, since it is possible to separate the second annular group 103 far from the game window 101 on the outside of the first annular group 102 to emit light, the outside of the gaming window 101 (gaming area 1100) is divided into a plurality of substantially concentric circles. The pachinko game machine 1 can be decorated in a light emitting manner, and by surrounding the periphery of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect which is not available in conventional pachinko game machines, and which attracts the attention of the player strongly. And can be.

  In addition, one circumferential lens unit 210a, 250a is provided with LEDs of two systems arranged in a substantially concentric circle shape. Since the light emission decoration can be performed in a substantially concentric shape, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emission decoration from the appearance. 240) can be greatly changed, and the impact of the light emission decoration can be increased to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. FIG. 55 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main body frame. 57 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 58 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the main body frame as disassembled and seen from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a front surface of the main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are respectively attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the body and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and a lower front surface of the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 that is mounted on the game board 4 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a prize for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 that is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 and a ball outlet that is mounted on the front surface of the body frame base 600 and blocks the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3. Opening and closing It is provided with a knit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, the back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 62 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is located in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth. As shown in the drawing, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding that can fit and hold the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. The opening 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body in the door frame 5 Door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of 110, upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side projecting rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted and the game board mounting portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantial center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 55) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 62). As shown in FIG. 61, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, in the main body frame base 600, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and on the front right side front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. With the ball-striking launcher 650 attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball that has been played is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction so as to penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604, and a plurality of main-frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 59 etc.), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall 604. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface of the board unit 800 face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around a shaft center supported by a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixing tool 690, the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and by abutting on the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

  Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( As shown in FIG. 62), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front (front side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view. Then, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 57).

  Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from an intermediate position in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher in the vertical direction and through which game balls can flow. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed to be closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear side, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction to pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[4-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 on the front and left front end upper and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using the predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

  First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 57) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension part 632 is hung downward from the left end of the front extension part 632 in front view and the door frame 5 is pivoted to the open side. And a stopper (not shown) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extending portion 642b. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end portion of the front side of the front side view 642b, and restricts the swinging end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support metal fitting is provided. The front extension portion 642b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween. ing.

  The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The hole 642c is located coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. By sliding the shaft pin 155 downward so that the upper shaft supporting portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extending portion 632 of the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 vertically overlap with each other, and then sliding the shaft pin 155 upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[4-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 is capable of driving the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the firing solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 is provided between the launch rail 660, which extends diagonally to the upper left in a front view from a predetermined position on the trajectory and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and the launch rail 660, which is above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time as the tip 658 is made passable, a gap is formed at which the game ball cannot pass, and the game ball is held at the base end of the launch rail 660. The stopper 662 and the ball stopper 662 restrict the rotation of the batting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from the batting position where the gaming ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664 that operates.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the rotary drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to a rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . In addition, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a so that the distal end thereof coincides with the axis of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a rod portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip end in the direction of the normal line, and a stopper portion 656c that extends toward the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a sandwiched with respect to the rod portion 656b and can come into contact with the stopper 664, Is equipped with. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 abuts on the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

  Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to extend substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 87), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shaped recess, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation at a position apart from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, and it is possible to absorb the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts, and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutting. It is like this.

  As shown in FIG. 57, FIG. 87, etc., when the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall part 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and the lower rear wall part is. It is arranged to be located below the upper end of 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), and the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction with a predetermined width is formed between the lower end and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4130 with a driving strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball and drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is designed to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven simultaneously with the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 ( By turning on), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the hammer 656. There is.

[4-4. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view showing a rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. In addition, FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Based on a predetermined payout instruction, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is paid out to the upper plate 301. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank mounted on the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko Island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and the game balls which are aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game balls are full. It is mainly equipped with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 of the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 formed on its rear surface (see FIG. 68).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is made of synthetic resin and is integrally molded. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a prize ball tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and an external terminal board 784 arranged beside the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). And an external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the external terminal plate cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 to the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the rear side of the vertical side, and the prize ball passage 715 which is adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 and which guides the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the award ball base 710 is provided with an attachment hole, an attachment boss, or the like for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, or the like, or the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in plan view; A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear part projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the right rear portion 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (the shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, the rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, and the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. Put the tank 720 on the prize ball base 710. An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, one end of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725, and a weight is held therein. . The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. In addition, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730, and It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723 in a plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with a predetermined depth that is open at the top and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted to be low. This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 72) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 67) that project further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided. This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) when viewed from the front is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the top of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped by the ball leveling member 727 to the next level, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and the alignment gear 732 is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 731a on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately won one by one. Device 740.

  It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is designed to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated so that the protrusion 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 b to the inside of the tank rail 731. By inserting into the tank rail 731, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and to stop the supply of the game balls to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the rear end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end (right side of the rear side) of the sorting space 741b in rear view and extends downward and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support plate 743 disposed below the back cover 742. , A payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can rotate integrally. A first gear 745 that is fixed and is disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a unit base 741 that meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the payout rotary member 7 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. 8 and the pay-out rotator 748 are integrally rotatably fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits 749a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And a detection board 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c. Counting switch 751 for detecting the rotation angle, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a formed in a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle switch 752. The rotation angle switch board 753 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 742 relays the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board 4110. And a substrate 754 in the ball case.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the base plate 754 in the prize ball case from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate). 749), and a rotation angle switch substrate 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 can be contacted. The supply passage grounding metal fitting 757, the screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and the back cover 742 can be attached to and detached from the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 for supporting the.

  In the prize ball device 740, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 to close the open rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. It has become so. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is partially cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating direction below and below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 750 by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-off switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall being out of ball It will be notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

  The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment / detachment button 759 is formed on the top of the back cover 742, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball case substrate 754 and the substrate cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay substrate. A rotation angle switch substrate mounting portion 742c for mounting the rotation angle switch substrate 753, which is disposed below the mounting portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotor 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in the present embodiment, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. The heat can be easily dissipated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recesses 748a one by one, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the payout rotary body 748 are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board 749, and The rotation position of the pay-out rotating body 748 can be detected by detecting the detection slit 749a by the rotation angle switch 752, which are provided at positions corresponding to the space between the recesses 748a. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotor 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

  In the prize ball device 740, the payout motor 744 is rotated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, or the like to the payout control board 4110 or operating the ball removal switch 860b. Then, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is simultaneously rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is adapted to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotor 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps.

  In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 71, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank branching unit 770, a main body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit 800. It is possible to discharge to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 68 and 72. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are full, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened upward at approximately the center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 72). And, a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 72), and the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged to the front to front the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 72). A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal port 777 that opens upward to the left end in front view of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball received in the receiving / receiving port 777 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged to the front and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branching unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And, the game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is configured to communicate with the second ball inlet 542c so as to face each other, and passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. The game balls supplied to the full tank ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 779 is the body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

  In the full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, and passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be discharged from the 544a to the upper tray 301 side stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to fill the upstream normal passage 773. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b under the dish unit 300. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game tank is filled with the game balls until the full tank is resolved. Since it can be supplied to the plate 302, the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko game machine and the ball is no longer supplied to the ball striking device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the typing, and to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  As described above, the full tank branching unit 770 branches off the passage of the game balls to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls that have accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are directly driven by the hitting ball launching device 650. The game balls can be played, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 small, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided. It is possible to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and to entertain the player by the large game area 1100.

[4-5. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game ball.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction; And an opening / closing spring 794 that biases the

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view to support the opening / closing crank 793 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. From the right side to the right, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and the drive rod 793b is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792 by protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open / close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, the drive pin 793c of the open / close crank 793 is vertically rotated in an arc shape by rotating the open / close crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c is inserted. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the driving hole 792b. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated clockwise in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening / closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 moves up to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Is able to.

  In this way, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[4-6. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Also, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. FIG. 80 (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

  The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840 A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main door relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. I have it.

  As shown in the figure, the board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 has a shape that extends in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction descends one step downwards and gradually inclines upward toward the left and right ends, and then from the front surface to the front. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 that protrudes to the front, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position of the center of the shielding wall portion 811 in the left-right direction and that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front view below the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a cylinder penetrating in a laterally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the front view left side of the board mounting portion 813. -Shaped duct portion 814 and a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped transparent members penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. And 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls that have flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Is able to.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 attached so as to face the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This emission power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a, and the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are provided. The combined current obtained by merging with the current generated by the discharge is driven through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a slit 830a as a heat dissipation hole is formed on the side surface of the emission power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged. . In addition, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 into two spaces, a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC / DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting. The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is used as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed by being released to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. The miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the entire launch power supply board box 830. Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to restart the game.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing solenoid 654 drives and fires. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the pachinko island facility, it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. It has a very long life compared to. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 that is separate from the power supply board 851, so that the life is shortened. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 which is opened upward on the left front side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box accommodating portion 843 that is open to the front and the upper side and can accommodate the rear side of the firing power board box 830; And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball-out passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the board frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed into the game ball and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharging unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842. It can be discharged downward.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 79, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 97) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separating / cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating / cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Therefore, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball-out switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc., which are attached to the payout control board 4110, face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 56). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 includes a board base 871 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and a frame peripheral relay terminal mounted on the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed to the rear panel peripheral terminals 872 toward the rear. A board 868, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and having the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed rearward, a peripheral panel relay terminal 872, and a CR unit relay terminal 873 are rear A substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the side. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 4140 and the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-door relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face from the front surface of the main frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and at the same time, the relay terminal plate cover 692 is covered. Only the connection terminal is exposed to the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance (see FIG. 55 and the like).

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the switches 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. 81A is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and FIG. 81B is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed on the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main body portion 902 in front view. An engagement piece 908 is provided which engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively.

  In addition, the back cover 900 penetrates in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape along the lower side on the left side of the connection cutout portion 910 when viewed from the front side, and the connection cutout portion 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body portion 902 on the right side when viewed from the front. The confirmation opening 912 and the confirmation cutout 914 cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

  The back cover 900 can open and close the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the back support shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 on the back cover 900, and the engaging piece By engaging 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. Although not shown in detail, the front cover left side of the back cover 900 is provided on the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 by a predetermined screw in addition to the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a. It is designed to be fixed to.

  Further, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 so that the RAM clear switch 4100e, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 are exposed to the rear side through the connection cutouts 910. It has become. Further, in the back cover 900, a sealing seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the main control board box 1170 passes through the confirmation cutout 914. The sealing portion 1176 is exposed. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm the operation and the appearance of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is used for the main body frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side.

[4-8. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction and having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and a front-rear direction having a substantially constant depth. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side surface crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side member. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. You can do it. Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced so that the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported. It has become.

[4-9. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. 82A is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. FIG. 83 (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 83 (B) is a sliding rod for a glass door frame and a sliding for a body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a rear perspective view showing a rod, and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass rod frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. Yes, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 61. In addition, the door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 on the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, the lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and the peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 is extremely thin in its lateral width dimension as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed in an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to fraudulently act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the open side (rear side) and the closed side (front side). A hook passing opening 1002, an upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 84) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, a screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle, and a screw stopper portion. An upper end portion and a middle portion on the open side (front side) of a side surface 1001a (see FIG. 84) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and forward projections from lower ends of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

  The screw fastening portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 621 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

  The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stopper 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions in the upper, lower and middle of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole for the door. Since the structure is such that the lock device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame base 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the locking device 1000 on the front side and the rear side. It can be fixed to. Particularly, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking protrusion 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the rear side fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the close side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking it with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side, and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached at the upper and lower two positions so as to be mounted with the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in the bottom of the lock device 1000 and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward; Is equipped with.

  The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 84, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 opens vertically in a plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above and diagonally so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 86B (clockwise rotation in FIG. 86B).

  Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from the outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted “te” shape, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 are provided at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, middle, and lower portions of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is projected forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 57 and 61, etc.) protrudes forward and the door is opened. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet slot 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that penetrates the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protrusion movement holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion to lock one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes an abutting elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the door frame sliding rod 1040 to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 in the lower rear portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. Is equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, but is made of a metal including the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating left and right in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051. The mutual movement with the 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The elongated hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. In addition, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without any play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state where they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, insert the rivet 1006 from the insertion hole 1005. .

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

  In this way, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 forming the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIG. 85, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 85 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 85A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 has an upper side inclined downwardly toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts against the lower end portion, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are again locked with each other. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 85A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In addition, the locking device 1000 does not allow an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. It has become. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of doing. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention cutout 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is tampered with. It is in a state of being engaged with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), by rotating the key, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is released. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the entire main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 86 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 86 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

  Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

  As described above, the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which the L-shaped base body is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

  Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, middle and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws, it is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a lock formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that mounts the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 uses the lock mounting piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

  Further, in the locking device 1000, the one in which the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b is shown. The frame-shaped sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame-shaped sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is L-shaped. As a base body (lock base body), a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod 1050 are housed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall. The structure may be good, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

[5. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. FIG. 87 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine removed. 88 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to the pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 93 is a game as seen from the back of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 92 taken in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. Based on a control signal from the main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. And a function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visually recognized by the player. To have. The gaming board 4 includes a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150, although the illustration in FIGS. 87 to 94 is omitted and the details will be described later. Further, it is provided (see FIGS. 95 and 96).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape is a substantially circular shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and thus has an inner shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view in a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through an upper end in the left-right direction in a front view. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the outer rail 1111. The end portion (upper end) is tied to the end portion (upper end) of the game ball that has been rolling along the outer rail 1111 and the hitting portion 1114 is capable of contacting the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1113. At the boundary portion of the game area 1100, the outer opening guide surface 1115, which is arranged at the lowermost end and becomes lower toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112 are rotatably supported, and the outer rail 1111 is closed. As described above, it is rotatable only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the space between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launch device 650 is formed. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is inserted. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

  Further, when the game ball is strongly hit in the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by abutting the game ball on this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, it is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to enhance wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball, and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 that protrudes from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118, which extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 of the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention post protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. At the same time, the post-crime projection 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. The inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection 182 also prevent unauthorized tools such as a piano wire that have entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100. Is able to.

  In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are spaced apart at the right end when viewed in the vertical direction. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged as a set, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122 that is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the body frame 3. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage cutout 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 is held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 that is thinly formed, and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 that is arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view and sticks a certificate paper for proof confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in the fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the outer-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. A ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component 1110 and a downward projection 1152 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner of the front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front constituent member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front constituent member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 90) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the inside, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open upper side and a front side. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to vertically penetrate at a front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and an upper surface of the bottom wall portion has an out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lower toward the discharge portion 1161, are discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the substrate holder 1160. Are discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The out-ball discharging portion 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from all are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed such that the tips are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at a rear end left end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[5-4. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 is a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end in rear view of the board base 1171 and fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end in rear view of the board cover 1172. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in rear view with two elastic fixing pieces 1175 sandwiched therebetween to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) that is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. And a protective cover 1177. The sealing section 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating / cutting section 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed in any one of the four sealing sections 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened can be visually discriminated from the outside.

  Since the main control board box 1170 has four sealing portions 1176 in this embodiment, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 is provided with a hermetic seal extending over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut or peeled off. It is necessary to do so, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened / closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the misconduct.

  Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100e and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display portion 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 91, one LED for displaying a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. Consisting of a game state indicator 1183 and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183, and an upper special symbol memory display for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101. Device 1184 and one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the upper special symbol memory display device 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101, as the first special symbol An upper special symbol display 1185 consisting of and a diagonally upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185, and is drawn by receiving a game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. From the lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as a second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186 It is provided with a lower special symbol memory display device 1187 for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball into the lower starting port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reservations regarding the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls, which are arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for doing, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball that is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and passes through the gate portion 2350 is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the special winning opening 2103 And a round display 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening / closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and a combination of a light emitting color and lighting / blinking. It is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.).

  Further, the upper special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the upper special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is received in the upper starting opening 2101, The start of variable display is to be held (stored), and the number of held (memorized) first special symbols is displayed. Above this special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a, 1184b lighting · The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the lower special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is received in the lower starting opening 2102, The start of variable display is held (stored), and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b are lit up, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. The special lottery result is displayed, and after the 7-segment LED has changed for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops, and the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes the first special lottery result and The player can recognize the result of the second special lottery.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red / green / orange color and a full-color LED capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting / flashing. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2350. The display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the start of variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol storage display 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols. In this embodiment, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a composed of a predetermined LED and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b, and by turning on the respective lamps, a round in the "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the lower special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol memory display 1188, The normal symbol display device 1189 and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 97). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, Make the position of the display unit 1181 recognized by a player, a game hall clerk, etc. without confusion It has to be able to bet.

[5-6. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is a plate-shaped plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, which is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and is larger than the outer shape of the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is a minimum necessary amount that can be sufficiently held even if an unillustrated obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 that are arranged near the outer periphery and are formed in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. Is equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step portion 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in the present embodiment, It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a length of about 20 mm. The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1210 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands or contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engaging claws 1224 and engaging pieces 1225 which engage with the engaging step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. A predetermined amount of space is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement stepped portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 has a boss insertion hole for the front component member 1110. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side thereof, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this attachment support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is formed in a shape that is recessed in a state in which the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side projects rearward above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the recess amount ( The depth (in this embodiment, about 2.5 mm) is enough to accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 96) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is fixedly attached to the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is a main frame. 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a front flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a of the back box 3001 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In addition, in this embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small inner diameter hole are mixed to have a proper diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 92, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the ball hitting launcher 650. However, the guide is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape and supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1120, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and downward. Is opened to the front, and a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view are inserted. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 93) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 93). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and by fitting the out-ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the installation device, and suppress an increase in cost for planting the faulty nail. You can do it.

  Although not shown, the game panel 1200 has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. The front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Accordingly, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. It is possible to embody the pachinko game machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the gaming board 4 compatible with various models can be configured by replacing only the panel plate 1210. .

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in advance in a predetermined arrangement, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different from each other, the panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is model-independent, by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It is like this.

[5-7. Detailed composition of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is a detailed front view of the game board. Further, FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 95 as disassembled and seen from the front.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and an outer circumference of a game area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating the handle device 500. And a frame-shaped front component member 1110 that divides and forms the front component member 1110 in a front right lower corner of the front component member 1110 at a position where it can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The function display unit 1180 arranged, and a plurality of openings 1158 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in a predetermined shape (FIG. (See 96)), a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a table unit 2 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side. 00, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150, the.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and after the game panel 1150 with respect to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and that is visible from the player side according to the game state, A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 are provided.

[5-7-1. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is an attacker unit 2100 which is disposed above the outlet 1151 at the lower center of the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning hole member 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged on substantially the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150, Is equipped with.

  The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and then attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion projecting to the front side of the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. As a result, the table unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nail that is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to add a change. In addition, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls hit into the game area 1100 can be received, and specifically, in the left-right direction. Of the upper starting port 2101 disposed below the lower starting port 2102 and the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101, and the upper starting port 2101 disposed below the lower starting port 2102 Also has a rectangular big winning opening 2103 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2104 that is arranged on the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 and slightly above. The game balls received in the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper starting opening 2101 of this attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be opened by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 97) between the lower starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand up substantially vertically, the upper starting opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive a game ball into the lower starting opening 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 can move. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the lower starting opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally elongated rectangular opening / closing member 2107 capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 has a lower side rotatably supported, and in a substantially vertical state, it can close the special winning opening 2103 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is turned to, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be received. This opening / closing member 2107 is in a state where the special winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is performed when a game ball is received (start winning) in the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 97) is driven to open and close.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward as shown in the drawing, and the game balls can be always received (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 or the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. An upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper starting opening 2101 and a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are provided in a back unit 3000 described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side winning mouth member]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is in the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is attached to each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in front view of the attacker unit 2100. Two general winning openings 2201 are provided so as to face each other. These two general winning openings 2201 are open upwards so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the game balls received in the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where its left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at its upper left end, and is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the right end. The shelf section 2202 and the first shelf section 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with two general winning openings 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward the 2103 side), and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved to the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

  It should be noted that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf portion 2202, and even if the game balls are moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 as well, a third shelf portion 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is provided.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening member 2200 is provided by the side winning opening decoration board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. Is said to be capable of emitting light.

[5-7-1c. Center goods]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 on the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. As shown in the figure, it is fixed to the front surface, is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is outside the game sphere with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line that hangs so as to form a region of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game region 1100. Is formed in.

  This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 which is inclined to the left from the position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to decrease toward the left. Is provided, and the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 when flowing down to the upper shelf 2301, and to the right of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. That is, if the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the hitting strength of the game ball is high. It is possible to adjust the length appropriately, and to maintain a sense of tension so as to prevent the game from being played aimlessly.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the upper game area 1100 of the attacker unit 2100 to be a center character object. A stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in 2300 is mainly provided.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 has a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied, and a game ball from the first stage arranged on the front side of the first stage. It is provided with a second stage which is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the bottom front surface of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the outlet 2314. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball emitted from the chance exit 2314 is highly likely to be accepted into the upper start opening 2101 (winning prize). To do).

  The stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 of the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. Has become.

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 is transparent on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302, and to the left so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112. The arch part 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center role object 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. This gate portion 2350 is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and detects a gate entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball entering the gate entrance. It is provided with a gate switch 2352 for turning on and a gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In this embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is the arch. The part 2315 is made to appear as if it were dived.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 penetrates in the front and rear direction in a circular shape or an X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center role object 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. The plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed as described above are used for light emission decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged on the rear side of the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 are disposed on the rear side. A lower panel lens substrate having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its surface is provided.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 of the panel lens member 2500 are a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emission decoration hole to be inserted. It has a section. When the insertion light guide portion 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, its tip is formed so as to be substantially coincident with the front surface of the game panel 1150 and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed not to affect the game ball as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can cause the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light as appropriate, so that the region into which the game ball flows down can be illuminated by using an opaque game panel 1150 such as plywood. The decoration of the game panel 1150 which has never been seen can be shown to the player, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made conspicuous to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-7-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and as shown in the figure, supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance rearward. A back box 3001, an upper unit 3002 arranged in the back box 3001 above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a sub liquid crystal unit 3400 arranged in the back box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a back box 3001 And a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The back unit 3000 is arranged near the lower left front end of the back box 3001 at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. The side lamp decoration board 3014, the game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and the game received in the left general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that is arranged on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and that guides the game ball received downward to the upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the right general winning opening 2104. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board box having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is arranged in a lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and accommodates a lamp drive board 4170 (see FIG. 99), and a back box. Panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 97) fixed to the rear side of 3001 and arranged on the left side in the rear view of the lamp driving board box, and a horizontally long rectangular upper resistance arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001. It further includes a substrate and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to detachably hold the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., makes it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The back unit 3000 is configured such that the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 can move independently or in association with each other according to the game state, and the movement allows the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of opportunities and the like, and entertain the player.

[5-7-3a. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the game panel 1150 is provided through the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed on the rear side. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through this opening. Further, the back box 3001 has mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, etc. at appropriate positions.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 (the right side in the rear view) protruding outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the right side of the opening in the rear view. A liquid crystal display is provided by providing a support portion, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening in rear view, and the lock member supports the other fixing piece 1902 (left side in rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-7-3b. Induction member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths, respectively. It is designed to be discharged, and a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side to the lower end through different flow paths, respectively. An upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in a flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and a general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in a flow path corresponding to the right general winning opening 2104. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening in the back box 3001 facing the liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at the substantially center in the left-right direction, and has a circular decoration unit 3200 that is circular in a front view, and an elevating mechanism that is arranged on the rear side of the rotation decoration unit 3200 and moves the rotation decoration unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged at the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is vertically moved by the elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. You can do it. In this rotating ornament unit 3200, a rotating ornament formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and when it is rotated, the rotating radius of the rotating ornament is expanded by the centrifugal force. It is like this.

  In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, not only the rotating decorative body rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotating radius of the entire rotating decorative body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, suppress the entertaining of the player and reduce the interest in the game, and attract the player's attention. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game while being greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  Further, the swinging decorative body unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with swinging decorative bodies arranged on the left and right of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotating decorative body unit 3200 located in the raised position, depending on the game state. The left and right swing ornaments can be simultaneously swung in the left and right directions. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending horizontally in the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction centering on the front end side, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in a descending direction according to the gaming state. Has become.

[5-7-3d. Sub LCD unit]
As shown in the figure, the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a three-dimensionally shaped character body, and depending on the game state, the character body is moved from the right end position to the center side position in the left-right direction. You can move to.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached to the character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 from the back surface side. The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state together with the liquid crystal display device 1900 or alone. A plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged around the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, which is a character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400.

  On the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, a liquid crystal output board box 3421 for housing a liquid crystal output board 3420 for receiving drawing data from the peripheral control board 4140 and transmitting the drawing data to a lower board, and a liquid crystal output board 3420. Via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and a sub liquid crystal relay substrate box 3423 for accommodating the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 for relaying the drawing data transmitted by the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the drawing data transmitted by the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. A sub liquid crystal driving substrate box 3430 for receiving a sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, a sub liquid crystal driving substrate box 3430, a sub liquid crystal relay substrate box 3423, and a liquid crystal output substrate. Install in a detachable order in the order of Box 3421. To have. The sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate box 3423, and the liquid crystal output substrate box 3421 respectively include fixing pieces (not shown) protruding outward from both upper and lower sides, and are attached to the back box 3001 via these fixing pieces. It is designed to be used.

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 includes gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in plural in the up-down direction. The body is designed to rotate all at once.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. There is. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1900, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral board box in which a peripheral control board 4140 is housed on the rear side thereof.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 102. 97 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 99 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 101 is FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 102 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the control structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 97, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100d and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") and a main control built-in RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in. Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and this non-volatile RAM has a unique code (only one code exists in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. ) Is added to the unique ID code stored in advance. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  As shown in FIG. 95, an upper start opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entered is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c, and then input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b. Further, as shown in FIG. 95, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and a large winning opening 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 96 for detecting fraud using a magnet is a panel attached to the game board 4 first. It is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal board 4161 and is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, so that the start opening solenoid 2105 and the attacker 2105 are connected through the panel relay terminal board 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, or a panel relay terminal board 4161 from the main control I / O port 4100b and a function display board 1191. The drive signal is output to the display device 1184, the lower special symbol memory display device 1187, the normal symbol display device 1189, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the game state display device 1183, and the round display device 1190.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Gaming balls are also frequently detected. Therefore, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches are used.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a serially transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. are received in a serial system. Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Now, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, etc., connects the bus 4100ah. They are connected via a circuit (see FIG. 106). The main serial transmission port 4100ae is for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. 106). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 103) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM with built-in main control when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4130 for controlling, an error LED display 860c for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 860c, and FIG. The prize ball tank 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removing switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided. ..

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payouts is a payout control MPU 4120a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. And a payout control I / O port 4120b as an I / O device and an external watchdog timer 4120c (hereinafter, referred to as "external WDT 4120c") for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally. ), A payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and a CR unit 6. CR unit input / output for exchanging various signals It includes a road 4120F, a. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e may be input via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  In FIG. 70, a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 flow down. The detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball to be input is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the prize ball case substrate 754 of the prize ball device 740, and paid out via the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first detected by the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the substrate 754 in the prize ball case. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the payout control I / O port 4120b and to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 4120e. Is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball case substrate 754, and the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display device 860c is output to the error LED display device 860c via the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued. It transmits to the main control board 4100 via the serial system 4120b, or outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED indicator 860c is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860c include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "ball is out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotating body 74 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other near the entrance thereof and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it is a "count switch error" (specifically. Indicates that there is a problem in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full" (specifically, from the full tank switch 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" ( (Electrical connection is disconnected in any part from the output control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically, Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the terminal for connecting the lending device such as the game ball. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit. The payout control I / O port 4120b is received via the input / output circuit 4120f and input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to rent the gaming balls or the like. The signal is output to the device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[6-2-2. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 98, the firing control unit 4130, which performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches for firing are input. 4130a, a transmitting circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch A firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

  From the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle, and the firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and then the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the CR control signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4130a and the firing timing control circuit 4130c. There is. The signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506, first indicates the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d via the.

  Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506. When the input is made, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e is triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192. The ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed. By stopping the output of the game ball, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 103) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-2-3. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards. The board between the payout control board 4110 and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls, the board between the CR unit 6 and the lending device connecting terminal plate 869 for playing balls, and the frequency display plate 365 and the lending device connection terminal for playing balls. The board and the board 869 are electrically connected by wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V to be described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") in this embodiment) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. It is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like.

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the component side at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, and the ball lending unit 360 is returned. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining count display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending remaining display portion 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through a gaming ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the gaming device lending device connection terminal board 869. It has become so. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Has become.

  The residual number display 365c is one in which three segment displays are arranged side by side in a row. Of these three-digit segment displays, one-digit segment display is sequentially driven, that is, three-digit by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The segment display of is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining number display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays an error of the CR unit 6. The residual frequency display 365c displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating the 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the 1-digit segment display unit sequentially emits light in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the contents due to the light emission of these 3-digit segment display units are left unpaid. It can be seen through the display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d through the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for lending a game ball or the like. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending enabled state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number display 365c through the current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  When the ball lending button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY which is a ball lending request signal. It is adapted to output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues one payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in this embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in the amount) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or telling that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connection terminal board for game balls, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like sets the CR unit 6 in advance, one payout operation is performed. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the prepaid card is ejected from the insertion slot (not shown). It is supposed to be returned. In the returned prepaid card, the remaining amount after the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361 is stored is stored.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided in the main frame 3. And a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information that specifies the date, and time that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds information and a music or sound effect that flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. And a sound volume adjusting volume 4140a for adjusting the sound volume by rotating the knob portion.

[6-3-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 99, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, which will be described later. A variety of information (for example, a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined to be continued over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is input. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data and information for managing schedule data that defines light emitting modes of various LEDs, and various information that continues across days (for example, a jackpot gaming state occurs). Information and special direction files for managing history Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing information for managing the peripheral) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 4150e"). , And) are provided. The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 851. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer hold and loses its contents. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore is not reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. A plurality of LEDs and / or a plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400, lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals for outputting lighting data on the game board side to the serial I / O for the lamp drive board. Motor drive data for driving the game board side for transmitting from the port to the lamp drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 Transmission from the board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4180, dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, etc. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the electric drive source is transferred from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame. Door-side light emission data for transmitting to the decoration drive amplifier board 194 or outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is a frame decoration drive amplifier. The signal is transmitted from the board LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In addition, the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the pressing detection switch 432c for detecting is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is door side serial transmission circuit. From the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown). The serialized data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. Is diagnosed.

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are read / written via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

  Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b through the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. The DMA / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are dedicated controllers that independently perform data transfer without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

  More specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae incorporated in the peripheral control MPU4150a, and a peripheral control internal WDT 4150af. , Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and other input / output devices for independent data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. Further, while reading and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and other input / output devices are independent from each other without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer by means of peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h, storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d are connected. While reading and writing, peripheral control is performed on input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. Read and write via the bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between the two.

  Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I / O ports, motor drive board serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port, a main control substrate serial I / O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control watchdog timer (WDT with peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is running out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a, or an upper decoration of the door frame 5. The lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED 286b which has a heavy meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED 286b is designed to be executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and the other LEDs except the LED 286b will be executed in the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 0 to 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 provided in the door frame 5 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game production, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are not completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume from mute to the maximum volume is adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. So that the can Rukoto. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act). , The maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming liable to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertisement sound is generated. Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and to render the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a more powerful one, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sound generation schedule for generating music and sound effects. There are data, electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, the track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  It should be noted that various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and may be executed. In some cases, the copied one is read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when an LED type backlight is mounted on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the 4165, and the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and is currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included in the liquid crystal display device 1900. If June has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, a luminance of 80%, which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%, is added. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and December has already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. If the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to 75%. And light up.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
The peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca that stores specifically a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, A backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing the created data exclusively, and a copy of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy areas 4150ce to be stored for backup, a backup non-management target work area 4150cf for exclusively storing various information not updated as a result of execution of various control programs, Is provided. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the work area 4150cf to be backed up and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command (see FIG. 120) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect and When it is for instructing the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (various information that is updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, is input. 1fr) as a backup target, Bank0 (1fr), and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The subsequent "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the V blank signal that conveys the fact is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, every one frame (1 frame). Therefore, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” have the same meanings (the same meanings for the effect information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1fr) described later). "(1ms)" means that a 1ms timer interrupt is issued, as described later. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed each time, and is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and The same meaning is also used for production backup information (1 ms) described later).

  In Bank 0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 and / or a plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 are provided. The game board side emission data SL-DAT for output is a storage area in which the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is provided with a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. Etc. is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is set, and is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to a reception command storage area 4150cac. An RTC information acquisition storage area 415 is a storage area in which various commands are received and the received various commands are set. cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae is received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the received command. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and drawing state An information acquisition storage area 4150cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. In addition, various information obtained by rotating the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction) and operating the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (for example, in the operation unit 400). Drawing information is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, which is created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided, are set. When the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it is output to the state information acquisition storage area 4150cak in order to notify that fact. Connection between the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 based on a LOCKN signal described later A storage area acquired information a defect frequency and occurrence of defects states in is set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the peripheral control section regular processing this time, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is located in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next routine processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage region 4150cab in this peripheral control unit regular process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

  When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is placed in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb has two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the storage area that is normally used, is stored in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the storage area that is normally used, is stored in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Peripheral control to Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a power-on command (see FIG. 120) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including power failure due to momentary power failure or power failure). Even when instructing the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated), zero clear is performed. Not done. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect also, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and special production flags). Information (for example, information) is exclusively stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and thus "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank 4” (the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area that manages one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area 4150db. 4150dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[6-3-2. LCD and sound controller]
Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are performed. As shown in FIG. 100, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and a liquid crystal display device 1900 and In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for controlling the drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, various character data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, music, sound effects, etc. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data of, and serialized music and sound effects And a, and audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as chromatography audio data.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After the data is extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a also extracts the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control ROM 4150b. The schedule data is stored when the V blank signal is input after being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to generate a sound source. Output to the built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

  Further, when the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is received by the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the received drawing data into abnormal data. When the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 determines that there is, a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, which notifies that fact is input from the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 and the liquid crystal output substrate 3420.

[6-3-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the built-in sound source described above, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. Is also created to generate sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. It is described as "." The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channels CH1 and CH2 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. , And is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the wiring length required for the path from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is short. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, and thus the channel CH2 to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route to becomes long, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, with respect to the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes long, in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 described later, "V-by-One By adopting a differential type communication called "registered trademark", the structure is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 is an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
Signaling) uses a serial-type differential interface, while channel CH2 uses a parallel-type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and output to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  Note that game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. 95 is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the lamp driving board 4170. The lamp drive board 4170 which has received the game board side light emission data outputs a drive signal to the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 based on the game board side light emission data. As a result, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a so that the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a can be gradation-lighted, lighted, or blinked. You can do it.

  In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives this input. Drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 by extracting sprite data by extracting character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the displayed screen data. Is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is output from the channels CH1 and CH2 to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. In other words, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated in the built-in VRAM. It is data for doing.

  The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 will be briefly described below. There is. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a each have 6 bits, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the sub liquid crystal transmitter. It is input to the IC 3420a. Since the lower-order 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower-order 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  Three video signals, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals that are a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. Are input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a causes three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock. These three signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. Through the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. And transmits to the liquid crystal driving substrate 3425.

  The signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 via the forced switching circuit 3420c. In addition to the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the forced switching circuit 3420c outputs from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140. The LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data to be generated, is differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d. The differential circuit 3420d serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a customer waiting state for demonstration. , Is there a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 described later, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver? In order to confirm whether or not it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The forcible switching circuit 3420c is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals, which are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d, are input, while the differential circuit 3420d performs the differential connection. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitization circuit 3420d, the circuit is configured to be connected so as to transmit the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. There is. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 3420d, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , While being transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d are not input, Since the circuit connected to transmit the signal output from the liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the liquid crystal during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state for demonstration. The LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the board serial I / O port to the liquid crystal output board 3420 (differentiating circuit 3420d).

  Upon receiving the serial signal (serial data), the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 restores various signals serialized by the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 into parallel signals and outputs the parallel signals to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. When the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the liquid crystal output board 3420. The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 to output the liquid crystal display device. It is displayed in the display area 1900 to notify the user.

  When the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data from the liquid crystal output substrate serial I / O port, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the liquid crystal output board 3420. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a informs the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. Then, a notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk.”) Is displayed, and the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is controlled through the liquid crystal output board 3420. Notification to output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and to inform that effect (For example, "There is a problem with the sub liquid crystal display device.") Is output from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5 A notification sound is played. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the notification sound repeatedly emitted from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like provided in the door frame 5. . At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 5 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 4 may be turned on.

  Further, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. To the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and also for the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, when drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output from the channel CH2 to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted. A V blank signal indicating that it is ready is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. The "frame buffer method" means, for example, that one frame (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the frame buffer (internal VRAM), and this frame buffer (internal VRAM) is held. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting the sound data such as sound effect and sound effect and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effect are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. . In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the sound source with a built-in VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 are amplified to a master volume value which is a volume, and the amplified effect sound is serialized to produce audio data as audio data. It is designed to output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and The volume of sound from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjusting volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually the speaker 821 and the door provided in the main body frame 3. Amplify to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the frame 5, serialize the amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Adjust the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually combined with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the volume value. 3 is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows from the speaker 821 provided in No. 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. To briefly explain the control that sends the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the track in which this effect sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume that flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. That was amplified to a master volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization. That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the effect sound is the above-described sound generation schedule data. Is proceeding according to.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and the predetermined period elapses. Then, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forced to be muted up to now is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the substrate volume is adjusted to the sub volume value. Is set again (at this time, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 Going on.

  In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal operation for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is caused. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is output from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Although the sound is produced, the muffled effect sound progresses in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. Therefore, after a predetermined period of the notification sound, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, When it stops flowing from 222, 262, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound started to flow, but a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point.

[6-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 102, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b draws main liquid crystal character data for drawing various images in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and various images in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In addition to an extremely large amount of character data composed of sub-liquid crystal character data for storing, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
As shown in FIG. 102, when the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c relays around the frame as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. The frame peripheral relay terminal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[6-3-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 100, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and sets them in the acquired calendar information and time information. Based effects can be unfolded in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. As such an effect, for example, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on December 25, or a screen for performing a New Year countdown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on New Year's Eve. Can be mentioned. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED type backlight. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of. Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa first. Input date information is also stored. Further, when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to perform ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed. Is set to the manufacturing date and time.

  As described above, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type are mounted, and the pachinko game. It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the machine type information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at low probability or high probability).

  The brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or dark depending on the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. There are also cases where it passes. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, it becomes possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. There is. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a screen for performing the setting mode. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and the time information and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a desired brightness. it can. The adjusted desired brightness is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED type backlight, the liquid crystal display device 1900 changes with time. Corrects the decrease in brightness due to. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and displays the calendar information and the hour, minute, and second for identifying the date. Brightness adjustment information for acquiring the specified time information and specifying the current date and time, and adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% in 5% increments. And brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if 6 months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the peripheral control ROM 4150b corresponds to it. When correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the correction information is acquired for this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10 ) Is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, 10%, which is the acquired correction information, is added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes%. Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-3-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a has a knob for rotating the volume of music, sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Can be adjusted by. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A / D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the knob portion is used. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222 provided in the door frame 5 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. , 262 to play music and sound effects.

  In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce the contents related to the game effect (for example, announcing that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, or that there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player) Sound from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is designed to flow without depending on the sound volume from the mute to the maximum volume by a program by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later). So that the it can be adjusted to your.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are provided. Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act). , The maximum volume) can be played.

  Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming liable to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertisement sound is generated. Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and to render the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a more powerful one, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and in addition to the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a screen for performing the setting mode. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume.

  Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included in a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the clerk at the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, with the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel the music or sound effect to be loud and noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the unit 400, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when the clerk in the hall feels the adjusted volume is small and it is difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, the operation unit 400 It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, and when the volume of a clerk in the hall feels loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 is operated. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, 10 times), the last time. The volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the clerk in the hall, that is, the volume is adjusted by the clerk in the hall by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, when the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and playing a game feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[7. Power system]
Next, the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. 103 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 104 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 103. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Although not shown, the grounds of the various boards and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply board 851.

[7-1. Power board]
The power board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 79 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the power factor correction circuit 851b. The power factor correction circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c removes an input + 37V ripple to smooth + 37V to + 5.2V creating circuit 851d, + 5.25V creating circuit 851e, + 12V creating circuit 851f, + 24V creating circuit 851g, and payout control board. 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The + 5.2V creating circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5.2V") from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which + 5.2V is applied and supplied serves as a + 5.2V power supply line. The + 5.25V creating circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5.25V") from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which +5.25 V is applied and supplied serves as a +5.25 V power supply line. The + 12V creating circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied serves as a + 12V power supply line. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates a direct current + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V") from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied serves as a + 24V power supply line. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and are supplied by the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. In addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 851.

  Further, the power supply substrate 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power supply for the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with payout control).

  The + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as described later. The + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and also to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “−terminal of capacitor BC1”) of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the electric power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. The electric current is designed to flow toward. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d by the electrical connection method in which + 5.2V is returned to the payout control board 4110 and then again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. It can be charged by applying 2V. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is prevented from flowing to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the payout VBB is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

  The negative terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “−terminal of capacitor BC0”) of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM which is the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. The electric current is designed to flow toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical circuit in which + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the power supply board 851 again from the payout control board 4110. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be mainly described.

  Three types of voltages of + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 103, and the main control board 4110 is supplied via the payout control board 4110. It is also supplied to the 4100. The four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is supplied via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. While being supplied to the 4140, three kinds of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V among the four kinds of voltages are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  As shown in FIG. 104A, the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are the drive source drive circuits of the motor drive board 4180. A drive signal is supplied from the drive source drive circuit 4180a to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the game board 4 and is supplied to the 4180a. Among the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of + 24V and + 37V are displayed on the liquid crystal display. Device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power supply circuit 1900b which generates a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is supplied. Is supplied to the backlight power supply circuit 1900b, and one of the four voltages, + 12V, is supplied to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. The liquid crystal output substrate 3420 is not limited to the transmitter IC 3420a for the sub liquid crystal shown in FIG. 102, and + 3.3V for producing direct current + 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 3.3V") from + 12V. A circuit 3420b and the like are provided. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generating circuit 3420b is supplied to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the like.

  Of the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170. The lamp driving circuit 4170a is supplied with various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 through the various decorative substrates of the game board 4 and / or the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. .

  The sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 is supplied with not only three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V through the lamp driving substrate 4170, but also the LCD + 12V voltage obtained by branching + 12V in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. The voltage of the kind is relayed to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is supplied with four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and LCD + 12V via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. Although + 12V and LCD + 12V are originally the same voltage, a wiring pattern is formed on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 so that + 12V and LCD + 12V are not electrically connected. This prevents formation of a closed loop power supply circuit of + 12V by electrically connecting + 12V and LCD + 12V. The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 has a power supply for a backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 from + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a, in addition to the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a that creates + 3.3V from the LCD + 12V. The backlight power supply circuit 3425b and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 are mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. 95. The sub liquid crystal display device is provided with various circuits such as a decorative LED drive circuit 3425c, and + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a, and a backlight power supply created by the backlight power supply circuit 3425b. 3450.

  + 5.25V is supplied to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c, and + 12V and + 24V are supplied to the decoration LED 3400a which is a full color LED. A plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a arranged around the character body of the sub liquid crystal display unit 3400 in which the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is mounted are two systems in which three full color LEDs are electrically connected in series and four full color LEDs. Are electrically connected in series to each other, and are provided with a total of 14 full-color LEDs. A full-color LED is one in which three LEDs of red, green, and blue are housed in one package. The forward drop voltage Vf of red is about 2V, while the forward drop of blue and green is about 2V. Since the voltage Vf is about 3V, when three full color LEDs are electrically connected in series, the blue and green Vf are about 9V, and when four full color LEDs are electrically connected in series, Vf of blue and green is about 12V. Therefore, + 12V is supplied to the two systems in which the three full color LEDs are electrically connected in series, while the + 12V is supplied to the two systems in which the four full color LEDs are electrically connected in series. , + 24V are supplied. That is, some of the decoration LEDs 3400a, which are full-color LEDs, are supplied with + 12V and some are supplied with + 24V. Based on the drive signal from the lamp drive board 4170 input to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c, It may be dimly lit, lit, or blinking. The decoration LED drive circuit 3425c receives the drive signal from the lamp drive board 4170.

  On the other hand, the three kinds of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Of the three types of voltage, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 supplies four kinds of voltages including + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a to various decoration boards of the door frame 5 in addition to the three kinds of voltages.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The supply control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. The + 5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure notification when detecting signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4140 as shown in FIGS. Of the door frame 5 via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It is designed to be transmitted to various decorative substrates.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4120. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used in the payout control board 4110 at all, and is directly supplied to the firing power supply board 831 via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

  As described above, by providing the power outage monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main frame 3 side, it is not necessary to mount the power outage monitoring circuit 4110b every time when the game board 4 is manufactured. Can contribute to reduction.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 is provided with the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described above. In other words, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the body frame 3 side are the closest to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side as a transmission path. It is supplied through the payout control board 4110 provided on the third side. As a result, as compared with the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure can be monitored in a relationship closer to the main control board 4100 as a transmission path. By configuring a short transmission path for transmitting the advance notice signal to the main control board 4100, it is possible to contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Also, by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line, respectively, the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line is monitored. Compared with the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure. In addition, recent pachinko game machines provide players with vibrant and powerful appeal by providing an extremely large number of electric decorations on the door frame, game board, etc. It tends to increase. Along with this, power consumption is also increasing, and opportunities for improving the power supply board are increasing. On the other hand, the payout control board is a board that exclusively performs the payout operation of the game balls, so that there is very little opportunity to remake it unless there is a major system improvement related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the above-mentioned reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided in the power supply board 851 but is provided in the payout control board 4110.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 4100 also includes a main control filter circuit 4100g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. The + 5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0 and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100c, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to the firing power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the emission power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF)). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to generate direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4130 on the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the circuit 4130d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “+ terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Are electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is caused to flow to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110. Has become. The detailed description will be given later.

  As described above, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, whereas + 5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. There is. + 5.2V and + 5.25V are control reference voltages of the respective control boards, but when electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via a wire (harness), the total length of the wires, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, which have short power supply paths, the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated to be small, and therefore + 5.2V is supplied from the power supply board 851. On the other hand, in addition to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in which the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, The lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and various decorative boards on the door frame side subordinate to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are Since the voltage drop caused by the wiring (voltage drop) can not be ignored, it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 + 5.2V is higher voltages + 5.25V is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 103 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply, the main control system reset IC, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, and the main control I / O port created on the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals such as 4100b and communication interface circuits between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control I / O port 4100b, a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, and a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the main control filter circuit 4100g mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5.2V is applied to the 1st terminal from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 through the payout control board 4110, and the 2nd terminal is grounded. + 5.2V from which the noise component is removed is output from the No. terminal. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

  The + 5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed with ripples removed by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) grounded to the ground. Has been converted. This smoothed + 5.2V is the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control I / O port 4100b. Are applied to the power supply terminal such as the VCC terminal and the like.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC3, and the VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC4. The ripple of + 5.2V input to the and VCC terminals is further removed and smoothed. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is grounded to the ground.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC5. ing. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor MR0. Connected to each other. That is, + 5.2V, which is the noise component removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100g, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0 to the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, when the power from the +5.2 V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is the main VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM does not operate. The memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 105, +5.2 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. A capacitor MC6 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the delay capacity terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacity of the capacitor MC6. . Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by a pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor MC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground and the grounded capacitor MC8, and + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 105, + 5.2V obtained by removing the noise component and smoothing by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC9, and + 5.2V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed + 5.2V is also input to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5.2 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The main control MPU 4100a, to which this clock signal is input, outputs the clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and receives the 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal. The terminal between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c outputs detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 103 are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and the circuit to which the power failure advance notice signal is input will be described here. .

[8-4-1. Circuit to which detection signal from RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR4. Connected to each other. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR4 and is also electrically connected to the resistor MR5 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR6 and electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The first and second pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded, and the fourth pin is electrically connected to the third pin. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the third pin and the fourth pin are pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while the third pin is operated when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. The 4th and 4th pins are electrically connected to the 1st and 2nd pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. Is applied to turn on the transistor MTR0 and turn on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR6 and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. To be done.

[8-4-2. Circuit to which power failure warning signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. Connected to each other. The base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is electrically connected to the resistor MR8 and is also electrically connected to the resistor MR9 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR10 and electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. Accordingly, when the power failure notice signal is not input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7, and when the power failure notice signal is input, it is pulled down to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit, and when the power failure notice signal is not input, the voltage pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. By being applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the power failure notice signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is lowered to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR1 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor MR10 and the logic becomes HI. The power failure notice signal 1 is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Is entered.

  The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, whereas the power failure notice signal is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100, while the power failure notice signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage of +5.2 V or more is applied. Also uses + 12V, which is a high voltage, to improve the signal reliability. Thus, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up like the detection signals from the RAM clear switch 4100e. Detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which is input through the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 97 while being pulled up to +5.2 V side by the resistance. The signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure notice signal from the payout control board 4110.

[8-5. Various input / output signals such as main control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via a data bus.

  The RXA terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a receives the serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 as the payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output the serial data to be sent to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal as a main pay serial data transmission signal, and from the TXB terminal to FIG. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown is output as a main-circulation serial data transmission signal.

  To the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b, the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 for notifying the normal reception completion of the main pay serial data reception signal is input. The other input pin of the input port PA and the input pin of the port set as the input port among the ports PB to PE are input through the circuit 4100c, and the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. Detection signals from various switches such as the above are input through the main control input circuit 4100c. The various detection signals input to the main control I / O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment master serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I / O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, of the ports PB to PE, the drive signal from the output pin of the port set as the output port to the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97 is transmitted via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. It outputs or outputs a drive signal to various indicators such as the upper special symbol indicator 1185 shown in FIG.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the payout control board 4110. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5.2V.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control board 4100 mainly includes pull-up resistors MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 has a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built in as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of.

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor are grounded. It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the MC 20 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 and electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Accordingly, when the power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is supplied. The charged electric charge can be continuously applied as +12 V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 105 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by the applied + 5.2V is at least the main internal MPU 4100a built-in main control signal. The main serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the circular serial transmission port 4100ae can be completely transmitted. As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5.2V. That is, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete the transmission of the main frequency serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission section, but this main frequency serial data is used as the control reference. Even if the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 by the voltage + 5.2V, the main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 by + 12V. Cannot be output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main frequency serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main frequency serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by + 12V. There is. As a result, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main-circulation serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being cut off. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main-cycle serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 105 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR21 as well as to the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be done. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is a negative terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 due to the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. .2V is pulled up and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Input to the input terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5.2V. When + 5.2V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, at least the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is: The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can be completely transmitted, and the main-circulation serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main-circulation serial Data is securely received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being shredded or lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. By doing so, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. When Since the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V from the pull-up resistor MR20 and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. Therefore, the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the voltage applied to the ground side to the ground side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. Is the logic of.

  As described above, in this embodiment, + 5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, + 5.2V which is the reference control voltage generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply substrate 851. A + 5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and a + 12V power supply line applied via the diode M20, that is, a + 12V power supply line to which + 12V created by the + 12V creation circuit 851f is applied as a communication control voltage, have a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and the communication control voltage are generated and dropped. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the + 5.2V power supply line and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply are added. The terminals are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a blackout or momentary blackout occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the + 5.2V power supply line drops, the main control filter that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the reference control voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit unit 4100g, the state in which the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistor MR20 and the resistor MR21 can be maintained. , MR22, and the interface circuit composed of the transistor MTR20, + 12V + 12V applied to the source line is applied as a communication control voltage to the anode terminal of the diode M20, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 that is the second auxiliary power source are electrically connected in parallel. As a result, even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the communication control voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD20 drops, communication from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is performed. By applying the control voltage, the state in which the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted while being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are used as main-circulation serial data, and all are composed of pull-up resistors MR20, MR21, MR22, and a transistor MTR20. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is set to 470 μF and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is set to 220 μF so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. As a result, even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all processed as main circumference serial data via the interface circuit. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can surely receive the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without breaking them and without missing them.

[9. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 112. 107 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 108 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit, etc., FIG. 109 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 110 is a CR unit input / output. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a firing control input circuit, and FIG. 112 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, and then the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120 unit circuit, the firing control unit 4130 circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784 will be described. Various output signals of will be described.

[9-1. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the power supply board 851 supplies + 24V, + 12V, and + 5.2V to the payout control board 4110, and + 24V and + 12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power outage monitoring circuit 4110b monitors the signs of + 24V and + 12V power outages or momentary blackouts, and when detecting the signs of power outages or momentary blackouts, a power outage notice signal is output as a power outage notice, and the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. In addition, it outputs to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and subsequently, the monitoring of + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure will be described.

[9-1-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (2SC1815 in this embodiment). There is.

  To the REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, + 5.2V is applied via the resistor PR20, and the current input to the REF terminal is the resistor PR20. Is restricted by. The K terminal outputs the reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is the comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21. The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC20 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). The terminal A, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator PIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. The other one (PIC21B) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V and the reference voltage Vref, the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. There is. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in this embodiment. The + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC21 grounded to the ground. The + 5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC22 grounded.

[9-1-2. + 24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the PIC 21A of the comparator PIC21 monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure by comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 107, + 24V is voltage-distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21A (the capacitor PC23 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 become a preset blackout detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in this embodiment) when the voltage of + 24V starts to drop or a momentary blackout occurs and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is the open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor). The PC 24 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but since the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, the logic Becomes LOW, ripples are removed by the grounded capacitor PC24, and the ripple is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

[9-1-3. + 12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC 21B of the comparator PIC21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 107, + 12V is voltage-distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded to the ground, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the PIC21B (the capacitor PC25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 are set to a preset blackout detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V is interrupted or a momentary blackout occurs, the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but since the comparator PIC21 is the open collector output type as described above, It is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 which is grounded and grounded, and it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the + 12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, so the logic is It becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 which is grounded, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure notice signal 1 is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR27. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 105 via a wiring (harness). Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is pulled up to the + 12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure notice signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded. Thus, between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4100b, the D type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I / O port 4100b are paid out. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the power outage warning signal 1 which is an ON / OFF signal using + 5.2V which is the control reference voltage gives a power outage warning, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the ON / OFF using + 12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V, is used. A power failure notice signal, which is an OFF signal, is used to provide a power failure notice.

  A power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 via the payout control I / O port 4210b. It is like this. Since the CLR terminal has a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is input to the CLR terminal via the payout control I / O port 4210b as its logic level becomes LOW. The D type flip-flop PIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 sets the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal. The 1D terminal that is the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal are grounded. The negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the inverted logic of the 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-2. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, + 5.2V from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to its 1st terminal, its 2nd terminal is grounded, and the noise component is removed from its 3rd terminal. + 5.2V is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

  The + 5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed with ripples removed by the capacitors PC1 and PC2, which are grounded to the ground. The smoothed + 5.2V is the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the payout control I / O port. It is applied to the VCC terminal or the like which is a power supply terminal of the 4120b.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCC terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC4 and the VDD terminal. The ripple of + 5.2V input to the and VCC terminals is further smoothed by removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is grounded to the ground.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and also electrically connected to a capacitor PC5 which is grounded. ing. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, and is also electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor PR0. Connected to each other. In other words, + 5.2V in which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, It is adapted to be applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. Accordingly, as described above, when the power from the +5.2 V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 illustrated in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying the payout VBB.

[9-3. Circuit of payout controller]
As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control I / O port 4120b, an external WDT 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f. In addition, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) is mainly configured as a peripheral circuit. Here, first, the external WDT 4120c will be described, and subsequently, various input / output signals such as a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f, and a main control I / O port, Various input / output signals such as the payout control I / O port will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (External Watchdog Timer)]
As shown in FIG. 108, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT 4120c resets the payout control MPU 4120a, and has a built-in watchdog timer. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage of + 5.2V reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal, or the payout control I / O is output from the payout control MPU 4120a. If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, the reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC6, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR1 pulled to the + 5.2V side. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In this embodiment, the clear signal release time is set to 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times), which corresponds to 20 times of the interrupt timer (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type and is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage pulled up to the +5.2 V side is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC7 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is higher than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control I When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the RESETN terminal of the / O port 4120b, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

  Further, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. Then, the logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. When the external WDT clear signal is not released as it is, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is smaller than the threshold value or input to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is not released while the external WDT clear signal is turned on within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded to ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded to ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. The ripple of the + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC9. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded to the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 108, +5.2 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC10, and + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed + 5.2V is also input to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is grounded to the grant.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-3. Discharge motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes the drive PIC1. The drive PIC1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded and the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the drive signal is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. The drive pulse is output.

  As shown in FIG. 108, + 24V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 103 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 via the Zener diode PZD0. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to + 24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. The + 24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as the drive power source for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. A drive pulse as an excitation signal from the collector terminal is connected to the resistors PR3 to PR6 and each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744 via the substrate 754 in the prize ball case shown in FIG. Phase). These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744, and rotate the payout motor 744. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged, and therefore the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected as protection.

[9-3-4. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, the error canceling switch 860a, and the ball removing switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 are input. First, a circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described, and subsequently, a circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input and a circuit to which the detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a is input. A circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removing switch 860b is input will be described.

[9-3-4 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the switch is turned on (conduction), and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 109, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the door frame opening switch 618 through the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the door frame opening switch 618 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 via the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31. A resistor PR32 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded to the ground are electrically connected between the resistors PR30 and PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and also electrically connected to the ground and a resistor PR33. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR34 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via the resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via the resistor PR36.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is electrically connected to the resistor PR35 and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR37 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38 so that the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR31 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a door opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the resistor PR36 as well as to the resistor PR39 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, and the transistor PTR32 has an emitter terminal grounded to open. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to + 12V by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR32 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the body frame 3. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the flapping phenomenon in which the contacts that make up are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35 and PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is Is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a door opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by turning on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit, and includes resistors PR36 and PR39 and a transistor PTR32. The circuit to be performed is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

  When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so + 12V supplied through the door frame opening switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and chattering is absorbed in the first stage. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 forming the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned on, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit in the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 forming the switch circuit in the final stage is also moved to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned off, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR38 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided in the main control board 4100 and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so + 12V is cut off by the door frame opening switch 618, and the base of the transistor PTR30 forming the first-stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off and the first stage switch circuit is turned off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 and the voltage is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR34, so that this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 that form the switch circuit of the final stage. Is applied, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned on, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled down to the ground side and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. The frame open information output signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the voltage applied to is output to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned on and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. The door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off when the main body frame 3 is closed, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off and the switch circuit of the last stage is turned on, and the door frame whose logic is LOW. The opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conducting), and the body frame 3 moves to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 109, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110, and the other end of the body frame opening switch 619 is It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 via the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41. A resistor PR42 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded to the ground are electrically connected between the resistors PR40 and PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and is also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR43. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR44 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via the resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 through the resistor PR46.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR47. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR34 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a main frame opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46 and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR49 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and is also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR35 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. The frame opening information output signal is output not only from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 but also from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 are used. An OR circuit is configured.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR40 and PR42 and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a body frame opening switch 619 when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. This is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to the flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the above are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is , Is the final stage switch circuit that outputs the main frame opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by turning it on / off by the ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit. The configured circuit is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by turning on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on. Therefore, + 12V supplied via the main body frame opening switch 619 is absorbed in the chattering prevention circuit by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage By being applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 forming the switch circuit, the transistor PTR33 is turned on and the first stage switch circuit is turned on. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltage applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 forming the switch circuit of the final stage is also moved to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the main frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided in the main control board 4100 and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. Becomes

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is off, so + 12V is cut off by the main body frame opening switch 619, and the base of the transistor PTR33 that constitutes the first-stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 turns off and the first stage switch circuit turns off. When the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 and is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR44. Is applied, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned on, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled down to the ground side and the main frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35. The frame open information output signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the voltage applied to is output to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the first stage switch circuit is turned on and the last stage switch circuit is turned off. The main frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100. When the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off in the state of being closed by the outer frame 2, the switch circuit of the first stage is turned off, and the switch circuits of the final stage are both turned on, and the logic of the main frame becomes LOW. An opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switches are turned on (conducting). Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. It will be in a state of being. As described above, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when there is a short circuit. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 2 can determine the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

  If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′, main body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 'is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3, and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned on. Even when is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 remains open from the outer frame 2. As described above, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ are normally open switches, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 can determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

[9-3-4 (c). Circuit to which the detection signal from the error release switch is input]
The pin 1 as the output pin of the error release switch 860a is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50 as shown in FIG. 109, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Is electrically connected to the input pin PA0. The first pin of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the second pin, and the third pin and the fourth pin are grounded. As a result, when the error release switch 860a is not operated, the pin 1 and the pin 2 are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error release switch 860a is operated, the pin 1 and pin 2 are pulled up. The 2nd and 2nd pins are electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

  The error canceling switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC32 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC32 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, the error release detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR50 and is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, the error release detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-4 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the ball removal switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 109, the pin 1 serving as the output pin of the ball-removing switch 860b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Is electrically connected to the input pin PA1. The pin 1 of the ball removing switch 860b is electrically connected to the pin 2, and the pins 3 and 4 are grounded. As a result, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the pin 1 and the pin 2 are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the pin 1 is The 2nd and 2nd pins are electrically connected to the 3rd and 4th pins and are pulled down to the ground side.

  The ball-shedding switch 860b is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC33 that is grounded. It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is set to HI by being pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR51 is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 99 will be described. From the CR unit 6, the payout control board 4110, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above, is a ball rental request signal BRDY and a one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and a ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 110, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (incorporating infrared LEDs and phototransistors).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the infrared LED built in the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. At times, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61 and also the base of the transistor PTR61 via the resistor PR62. It is electrically connected to the terminal. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the + 5.2V side.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the resistor PR61 and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR64 grounded to the ground. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR65 and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Of these, it is electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR60 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected to the resistor PR62 and also electrically connected to the ground and the resistor PR66. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR67 and electrically connected to the firing timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 changes, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 turns off and pulls up. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, the transistor PTR60 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side, so that the transistor The PTR 60 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is entered.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit, and when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 turns off and pulls. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the transistor The PTR 61 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. The switch circuit constitutes a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a described later.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photo-coupler PIC61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photo-coupler PIC61 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR69, and one of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b is preset. It is electrically connected to the defined input pin. The photocoupler PIC61 is turned on / off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR71 so that the payout control I / O port 4120b is provided with one of the input ports PA and PE in advance. It is electrically connected to the defined input pin. When the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC62 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 turns off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b illustrated in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is It turns off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. Through the CR unit 6, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned on. Therefore, EXS in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is Since it is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is raised to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR74, and EXS whose logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is It turns off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is connected to the game by the pull-up resistor PR77. Through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device thereof. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on. Therefore, the PRDY in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 through the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is Since it is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77, and PRDY whose logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various I / O signals of payout control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port 4120b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via a data bus.

  As shown in FIG. 108, serial data from the main control board 4100 is input to the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, as a main pay serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the serial data transmitted from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, to the main control board 4100 is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  To each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b, the error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0, and the ball removal from the ball removal switch 860b is input to the input pin PA1. The detection signal is input, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 which notifies that the payment main serial data reception signal has been normally received is input to the input pin PA2, and the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is input to the input pin PA3. Power failure warning signal 1 is input. Further, to each of the predetermined input pins of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b, a BRQ signal, which is a single payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6, and a ball rental request from the CR unit 6. BRDY signal which is a signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 such as a CR connection signal 1 for notifying whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, a door from the door frame opening switch 618 In addition to the frame opening signal and the main frame opening signal from the main frame opening switch 619, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 and the like are input.

  On the other hand, from each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b, the output pin PB0 outputs the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and the output pin PB1 outputs the EXS signal. , A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible is output, and the latch state of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. Power failure clear signal is output, an output pin PB3 outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is completed, and an output pin PB4 outputs an external WDT clear signal to the external WDT4120c. Has been done. A payout motor drive signal is output from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The drive signal of the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Launch control circuit]
Next, the firing control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the firing control unit 4130 includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 111, and the detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[9-4-1. Fire control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the firing control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110 receives the detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 of the handle device 500 as a handle relay. It is input through the board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 47, and the firing stop switch 518 is a single-shot button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. By operating 520, it is detected whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball according to the player's intention. First, a circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and subsequently, a circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 is input will be described.

[9-4-1a. Circuit to which the detection signal from the touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the touch switch 516 through the resistance PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay substrate 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the payout control substrate 4110 to connect the resistor PR81. Through, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80. The base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to the resistor PR81, and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR82 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC80 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR83 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR80 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR81 and PR82 and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the touch switch 516, and when the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the handle relay substrate. The voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, so that the transistor PTR80 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR80 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to +5.2 V by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the firing stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, one end of the firing stop switch 518 receives + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistance PR84 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 that is being applied is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistance is applied. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. The base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to the resistor PR85, and is also electrically connected to the resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and the capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR87 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR81 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the one-shot button 520 is not operated. The voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, so that the transistor PTR81 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the one-shot button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is lowered to the ground side, the transistor PTR81 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the +5.2 V side by the pull-up resistor PR87 and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  It should be noted that the switch circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 110 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Is also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

[9-5-1. Various input / output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, the payout control board 4110 sends a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, a power failure notice signal, frame opening information output information, etc. to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, the payout control board 4110 has a jackpot information output signal such as a 15 round jackpot information output signal and a 2 round jackpot information output signal in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the RAM clear signal, and probability fluctuation. Game information signals related to games such as medium information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving medium information output signals, starting mouth winning information output signals, etc. are input from the main control board 4100.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball showing the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70. Number information output signal, from the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to the jackpot information output signal such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special The game information signals such as the symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784.

  The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer (not shown) installed in a game hall (hall), and monitors the game and the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of big hits in 15 rounds). For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot or the 15-land jackpot from the total number of jackpots, the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is impossible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player may decide whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some choose. However, since the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter may be biased toward the number of occurrences of the big hits of two rounds in some cases, even if the player starts the game, only big hits of the second round occur. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player may be more motivated than necessary. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the big hit information output signal, the 15-round big hit information output signal and the 2-round big hit information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2-round big hit. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit. The number of round jackpot occurrences and the number of round 2 jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of jackpot game status occurrences. Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big hit information output signal and the 15-round big hit information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round big hit occurs, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit occurs, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. Driving method of firing solenoid]
Next, a driving method of the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. 113 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 115 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 116 are timing charts of predetermined points in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 113. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, the output voltage, the logic and waveform of the signal, etc. at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described.

[10-1. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 113, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball of the firing control unit 4130 of the payout control board 4110. The transmission solenoid drive circuit 4130e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor correction circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c.

  As described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the launch control input circuit 4130a causes the CR unit 6 to move from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A touch switch 516 that receives a signal indicating that power (AC24V) is being supplied and outputs it as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4130c to detect whether or not the palm or finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body. When the detection signal from is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a touch detection signal, and the detection from the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the intention of the player When the signal is input, the signal is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The firing timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal from the firing control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, since the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the firing timing circuit 4130c is not input with the CR connection signal. In the first case, the touch detection signal tells the front 506 of the rotating handle that the palm or the finger is not touching, and the firing stop detection signal forcibly stops the launch of the game ball. In the third case of transmitting, when at least one of the cases applies, the launching of the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 is prohibited.

  The launch timing circuit 4130c receives the clock signal from the sending circuit 4130b. When the launch solenoid 654 is allowed to launch the game balls, 100 game balls per minute are generated based on this clock signal. The emission reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 and output to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and the emission reference pulse is multiplied by a predetermined number (five times in this embodiment). Is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 with + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and stabilized + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter, " + 2.5V ”) is created and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can generate and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to a load. To the REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, + 5.2V is applied via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by this resistor PR90. The current is limited. The K terminal outputs + 2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. The + 2.5V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC90 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC90 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 113, the amplification circuit 4130db amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da by a factor of 2 to generate direct current + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay substrate 192.

  The amplifier circuit 4130db is mainly composed of an operational amplifier PIC91 as shown in FIG. The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and +2.5 V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, and the operational amplifier PIC91. Of the resistor PR92 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 and whose other end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR91 whose one end is grounded. Is electrically connected to. The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91 by two times, and the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle It is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC91 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC91 also serves as a low-pass filter). The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC92 which is grounded.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, which includes a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal, and the first fixed terminal is +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4130db. And the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded to the ground. When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotationally operated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is applied to the rotary handle main body front 506. According to the rotation operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is passed through the handle relay substrate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the resistors PR93 and PR94 (FIG. 114 (b)) to be described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control substrate 4110. The voltage divided by the resistance PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage.

  As described above, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded via the handle relay substrate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. 114 (b). The ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC93 (the capacitor PC93 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 is operated. It is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is in the order of volts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 at the first stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, outputs the voltage as it is in the volt order. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage which is a voltage of the volt order as it is, it outputs the voltage to the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the second-stage operational amplifier PIC93. The circuit is separated from the first-stage output side circuit. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input side circuit to the first-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output side circuit can be prevented from affecting the first-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC94 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 is a non-inverting input terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage ( (+ Terminal) is electrically connected. The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR93 and the other end of the resistor PR94 whose one end is grounded. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 is the voltage of the volt order and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94 because the input voltage which is the voltage of the volt order is simply output as it is as described above. The voltage, which is divided by the divided resistance PR94, is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage as a voltage of the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by one, that is, the millivolt order as it is is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. To do. Although the operational amplifier PIC93 in the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94 and is taken by the millivolt order resistor PR94, as it is, the millivolt order resistance divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The circuit separation is realized between the latter-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage which the PR94 is responsible for and the latter-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear-stage input side circuit to the rear-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the rear-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC95 grounded.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 flows through the resistor PR101 having one end grounded, so that a voltage of millivolt order that the resistor PR101 takes charge of is a voltage comparison circuit as a launch control voltage. Applied to 4130 dc. The firing intensity target voltage, which is the above-mentioned millivolt order voltage, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are, as described above, changed from the voltage of the order of millivolts to the voltage of the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d). The voltages are respectively reduced by the voltages assigned to PR101 and PR94. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at the millivolt order. In contrast to the above, it is possible to compare between the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650, and between the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via wiring (harness). Since the wiring (harness) is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by setting the voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is an inverting type circuit that compares the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage in magnitude, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130dd. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the firing control voltage is higher than the firing strength target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter, referred to as “L”), while the firing control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as "H"). In this way, since the output logic becomes H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130dd as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4130dd has a current from the DC / DC converter 831a provided in the emission power supply substrate 831 according to an ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc each time the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4130c is input, The combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the switching circuit 4130dd generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. While flowing to the firing solenoid 654, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is input, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and merges the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is flowing, when the voltage divided by the resistor PR101 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and is turned off. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd cuts off the constant current flowing in the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd. As described above, 4130dd supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. As described above, the switching circuit 4130dd generates the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. The switching circuit 4130dd controls the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc by self-excited oscillation to flow the current to the firing solenoid in order to apply the current to the discharge solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit” and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing strength target voltage. As a result, the front of the rotary handle body 506 is rotationally operated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is in the original rotation position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed value of the potentiometer 512. The voltage is applied to the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal. That is, the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 is in a state in which the voltage that the resistor PR100 handles is applied as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, the switching circuit 4130dd combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is applied to the firing solenoid 654. The current output from this DC / DC converter 831a becomes the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 is such that it at least jumps over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) commensurate with the voltage are combined. When the combined current is generated by the launch solenoid 654, the game ball shot by the launch solenoid 654 can jump over the launch rail 660, but along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Since it cannot reach the game area 1100, it will be received and collected at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 located at the bottom of the foul space 626 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been hit are collected as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the launch rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, and thus it is possible to prevent the launch solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented from being overloaded and a failure can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the offset voltage is set to the voltage for obtaining the minimum firing strength commensurate with the original rotation position when the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is the original rotation position. At the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball, the game balls launched by the ball launching device 650 along the launch rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 are all collected. It has become so. Thereby, at the time when the player starts the rotating operation of the front of the rotating handle body 506, even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotating handle body 506 to increase the launch strength, all the game balls Since it is possible to jump over the launch rail 660, it is possible to prevent the game balls from colliding with each other on the launch rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the firing solenoid 654, the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to increase the launch strength, so that the game ball launched this time at the launch strength is outer rail. By colliding with the previously launched game ball that descends along 1111, the previously launched game ball and the currently launched game ball can be ejected to the game area 1100. Even if the ball cannot be made to pop out, it is received as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and all is collected. In other words, even when the player cannot rotate the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, the launch strength is sufficient to jump over the launch rail 660, and thus the launched game ball. Do not collide with each other on the launch rail 660 to cause ball clogging. Further, when the player rotates the front of the rotating handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, the game ball launched this time at the launch strength is changed to the previously launched game ball that descends along the outer rail 1111. Even if it is not possible to cause the game ball hit this time together with the previously hit game ball to hit the game area 1100 by colliding, the foul ball of the foul cover unit 540 located below the foul space 626 as a foul ball. Since all are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player can rotate the rotary handle main body front 506 to further increase the firing strength, and thereby the game ball can be ejected to the game area 1100 without causing a ball clogging. . In other words, the game ball that was launched this time is collided with the previously launched game ball that descends along the outer and inner rails 1111 and the game ball that was launched this time is ejected to the game area 1100 together with the game ball that was previously launched. Even if the player cannot make the game feel uncomfortable, the player operates the front of the rotary handle body 506 to further increase the firing strength, so that the game ball is not clogged. Since it can be made to jump to the area 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the player's discomfort due to a ball clogging at the start of the rotating operation of the front of the rotating handle body 506.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 in the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is + 2.5V which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. The + 5.0V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage also holds the rotation position of the front handle body 506 at the same rotation position. If it is, the voltage is held at a constant voltage without any fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the firing control voltage to approach the firing strength target voltage by causing a combined current to flow in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650, and when the firing control voltage becomes the same as the firing strength target voltage, the rotation occurs. When the rotation position of the handle body front 506 is held at the same rotation position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change and a constant current flows, so the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball to the game area 1100. The firing intensity to shoot toward becomes the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  The pachinko island facility in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a gaming ball circulation system in which the gaming balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are polished and supplied again to the pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, the temperature inside the pachinko island facility is extremely high due to the heat generated by the polishing of the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric lights. . In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is accumulated in the pachinko machine. It is possible to output. As a result, the fluctuation of + 2.5V due to temperature is suppressed, so that the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the emission intensity target voltage can be suppressed, and thus the voltage of this “fluctuation” is suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output the control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd without including the above. In other words, when the rotation positions of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 are the same rotation position, it is possible to suppress "unevenness" in the launch strength for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, and thus to suppress "flying unevenness" of the game ball. be able to.

[10-2. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a, the input current at the TA point and the output current and the output voltage at the TB point shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIG. Point TA is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and point TB is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is the potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 115 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section C in which the current Iout increases by about 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from + 5V to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. The output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA in the vicinity of + 5V to zero V.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Have a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced from about 400 mA to about 320 mA by about 80 mA. In this section A, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 flows into the firing solenoid 654, and when the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball hit toward the game area 1100 is still a game. When the firing strength is such that it is difficult to reach the region 1100, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 flows to the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The game ball shot toward the area 1100 has a launch strength reaching the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout is increased by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 60mA from 320mA to 260mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. As a result, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C in which the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by about 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA, which is similar to the section B. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D in which the output voltage Vout is from + 10V to + 5V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by about 35mA from 210mA to 175mA, and the section B and the section are shown. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  In addition, when the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the merged current obtained by merging this 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotary handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, while the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. At a certain time, the merged current obtained by merging the 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise. Then, it is the electric current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the launch strength of the launch solenoid 654 is such that the game ball that has already jumped out to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the hitting portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner rail 1113, and is strong enough to be collected at the outlet 1151 without entering the various winning openings. Therefore, as a range in which the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a when the player is rotating the rotating handle body front 506 clockwise and playing the game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), the current is on the order of milliamperes.

[10-3. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and emission reference pulse from emission timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle main body 506, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 113, and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, This will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the point TB is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the point TC is the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referencing T0.

  As described above, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c allows 100 gaming balls per minute, that is, 100 gaming balls per 60000 ms, toward the gaming area 1100 when the launching of the gaming balls by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted. Since it is set to be ejected, its pulse width is 30 ms and its period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 116 (a).

  Here, DC / DC when the player touches the front 506 of the rotating handle main body to rotate the front 506 of the rotating handle main body to a limit rotation position and to a non-rotating original rotation position. The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is at the limit rotation position, it is shown in FIGS. As described above, the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow into the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to + 5V according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a becomes 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, after 30 ms have elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the input was stopped, and the discharge has proceeded until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By shutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging is started with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a is restored to around +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to 30 ms before the input of the next emission reference pulse T0.

  On the other hand, when the rotation handle body front 506 is in the original rotation position, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, FIG. 116 (b), As shown in (d), the merged current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current, and is emitted to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing in the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 116, but shown in FIG. Belonging to the section A, the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a becomes 360 mA which is the above-mentioned minimum output current. Then, when the input of the emission reference pulse T0 is stopped 30 ms after the input, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 outputs the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. The charging is started by the current Iout of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to 30 ms before the input of the next emission reference pulse T0.

  As described above, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the electric charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms after the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a independently adopts a control method of supplying a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In view of this, in this control method, the DC / DC converter 831a independently supplies a current of about 2 A to 3.5 A to the firing solenoid 654, and therefore this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large electric current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A instantaneously flows. Then, each time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases in each cycle T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to the electronic components, the electric decoration used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current flowing when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. When the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case where the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 during the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The ampere-order current supplied from the + 37V DC power source of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the emission reference pulse T0 is input until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. , A first current of the milliamperes order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply substrate 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the electrolytic capacitor When the SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it may be dispersed into the "second current" of the milliamperes order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, in the ampere order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the input of the emission reference pulse T0 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power source of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 during the period of 600 ms from when the emission reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the supplied "first current" and "second current" of the milliamperes order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the power supply board 851 from receiving a load for supplying a momentary large current due to the driving of the firing solenoid 654. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time-consuming design of operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball sending reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c and the ball sending reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referencing the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 113 is referencing the ball sending reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is the point to do.

  The ball-sending reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the 30 ms that is the emission reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 is driven by the ball feeding solenoid drive of the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d, as shown in FIGS. It is input to the circuit 4130e (timing t0, when 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to control the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. By this, the set of the game ball to be launched next can be completed by the time the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and the game ball is played in the game area 1100 every time the launch reference pulse T0 is input. You can continuously launch towards.

[11. Sub LCD drive circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate, and FIG. 118 (a) shows the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the luminance adjustment of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device, FIG. 118 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the variation in the luminance adjustment, and FIG. 118 (d) is a diagram showing the same. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a range of a rotation angle of a brightness adjustment volume with respect to a range of brightness variations of a backlight of a sub liquid crystal display device during new use and reuse. First, the reception of a serial signal and the like will be described, and subsequently, the power supply circuit of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the brightness adjustment work of the backlight, and variations in the brightness adjustment will be described. Note that, in FIG. 117, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 shown in FIG. 102 that relays between the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is omitted.

[11-1. Reception of serial signals, etc.]
The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 mainly includes a sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 as shown in FIG. 117, in addition to the + 3.3V generation circuit 3425a and the backlight power supply circuit 3425b shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 receives a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 shown in FIG. When the plus signal and the minus signal are transmitted through the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 separates the noise from the plus signal and the minus signal, respectively. Is able to. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the sub liquid crystal, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the disturbance of the serial signal.

  The sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is horizontally synchronized with three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and three synchronizing signals of a clock signal (that is, a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is used for the liquid crystal output substrate built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 as described above, in addition to the signal from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. The LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the serial I / O port, is also input in the differential circuit 3420d of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 into the plus signal and the minus signal. It has become. As described above, the forced switching circuit 3420c of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d are input. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 3420d, the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected to the circuit. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 3420d, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , While being transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d are not input, Since the circuit connected to transmit the signal output from the liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422.

  The forced switching circuit 3420c is a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, that is, a sub liquid crystal transmitter, when two signals that are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 3420d are not input. The serial signal (serial data) from the IC 3420a by the differential method "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal through the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and the common mode choke coil SDL0. To the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential signal 3420d receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. When you are, the two signals via the sub LCD relay substrate 3422, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are input to the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0. The sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d, are input, and will be described later. The LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 and the liquid crystal output board 3420.

  The LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140, is the pachinko game as described above. For the sub liquid crystal provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 during the period in which the startup screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the power of the device 1 is turned on, or during the demonstration in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Sent as a 3450 operation confirmation request It is intended. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d, it is a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, that is, the above-mentioned signal of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)". Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, and it is determined that the data is abnormal and will be described later. The LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. In other words, in the present embodiment, the function of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data is used to force the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to be described later. In order to output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the liquid crystal built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140. By outputting from the output board serial I / O port, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, the VDDO terminal, the LVDSVDD terminal, the PLLVDD terminal, and the PDWN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creating circuit 3425a, and the GND terminal and GNDO of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied. The terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE 0, and the MODE 1 terminal are grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal, which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for inputting LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI by supplying (applying) + 3.3V and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at a rising edge. This is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it becomes impossible to output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both terminals. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Is a normal operation mode in which the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signal), which are a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is confirmed (recovered). In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for requesting transmission is requested. The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, A parallel signal formed by the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal, which is a three-bit synchronizing signal (three-bit synchronizing signal), is restored by the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 into abnormal data for some reason. If it is difficult to draw on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2 that is a damping resistance of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, and the liquid crystal output board 3420. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a is connected to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a in order to inform the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Output a confirmation signal. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a connects the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. That is, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. When the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. Note that the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 may be directly electrically connected.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, and the liquid crystal output board 3420. It is input to the MPU 4150a.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that data output from terminals D0 to D17, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the resistor SDR4 that is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18 It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control substrate 4140, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 are electrically connected and are the same ground. Further, + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generating circuit 3425a is supplied to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

[11-2. Sub liquid crystal display backlight power supply circuit]
Next, the power supply circuit of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 supplies the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (in this embodiment, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 uses a white LED). The backlight power supply circuit 3425b for generating electric power is provided. The backlight power supply circuit 3425b mainly includes an LED current adjustment circuit 3425f that is optimally designed for constant current lighting of a white LED.

  + 3.3V is supplied to the power supply terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f, and the GND terminal is grounded. A capacitor SDC4 is electrically connected between the power supply terminal and the GND terminal to remove high frequency noise from the + 3.3V power supply line supplied to the power supply terminal.

  The SW terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is supplied with + 3.3V via the coil SDL1 and is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode SDD0. The cathode terminal of the diode SDD0 is electrically connected to the OVD terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f, and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor SDC5 whose one end is grounded.

  The SW terminal is a terminal in which switching is performed by an Nch MOSFET (not shown) built in the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f. By this switching, when the switch is turned on, energy is stored in the coil SDL1, while when the switch is turned off, the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released through the diode SDD0.

  When the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released through the diode SDD0, the OVD terminal is a terminal for monitoring whether the voltage due to this release is an overvoltage. When the overvoltage is detected, the switching by the Nch MOSFET (not shown) incorporated in the above-mentioned LED current adjusting circuit 3425f is stopped. When the applied voltage falls below the detection level, switching is restarted.

  In this embodiment, eight white LEDs are electrically connected in series as a backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and the white LED of the first stage (first) LED is generated by the switching operation described above. Voltage is supplied as the LED anode, while it is input from the cathode terminal of the final stage (eighth) white LED as the LED cathode to the FB terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f. The If adjusting terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f is electrically connected to the brightness adjusting circuit 3425g for adjusting the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED. . The brightness adjusting circuit 3425g is composed of resistors SDR5 and SDR6 which are fixed resistors and a brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. One end of the resistor SDR6 and one of the two fixed ends of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are grounded to the ground, while the other end of the resistor SDR6 and the remaining one fixed end of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 (ground and ground). Electrically connected to the fixed end (not fixed), both ends of the resistor SDR6 and two fixed ends of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are electrically connected in parallel, and one end of the resistor SDR5 is connected to the other of the resistor SDR6. The end is electrically connected to the remaining one fixed end (fixed end not grounded) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, while the other end of the resistor SDR5 is electrically connected to the variable end of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Has been done. One end of the SDR5, the other end of the resistor SDR6, and the other fixed end (fixed end not grounded) of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 are electrically connected to the If adjusting terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f. .

  As described above, the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g includes the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 that are fixed resistors and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 that is a semi-fixed variable resistor, and the combined resistance RSENS is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. From the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated, the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation has a linear characteristic. Rather, it has a characteristic that the amount of change of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the turning operation changes in a curved shape. The LED current adjusting circuit 3425f adjusts the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED so as to match this characteristic. That is, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f changes the current If flowing from the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (8th) white LED from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated toward the right side, the amount of change in the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation is small. It changes into a curved line.

  In the present embodiment, when the current flowing to the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA so as not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA (milliamperes)) of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, it is fixed. The combined resistance RSENS including the resistances SDR5 and SDR6, which are resistances, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is a semi-fixed variable resistance, is about 12Ω to 20Ω. As the resistance SDR5, which is a fixed resistance, a general-purpose product, which is easily available and inexpensive, is selected as 24Ω. As the resistance SDR6 which is a fixed resistance, a general-purpose product, which is easily available and inexpensive, is selected, 27Ω, And, as the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, 100Ω of the chip type cermet film ceramic semi-fixed variable resistor VG039N manufactured by Hokuriku Electric Industry Co., Ltd., which is a general-purpose product and is easily available, is selected, and the rotation angle is 0. The resistance value can be adjusted from 0 Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, to 100 Ω, which is the maximum resistance value, by rotating the rotor from 0 ° to 270 °, and the resistance value is approximately 0 per 1 ° of rotation angle. It can be changed by only .37Ω. The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature at the time of adjusting the brightness of the backlight described later is shown by the solid line in FIG. 118 (a). When the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is the maximum of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. It is assumed that the resistance values of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are the fixed resistances described above, are selected so as to be about 45% with respect to the rated brightness, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to 100Ω which is the maximum resistance value. Also, the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 85%.

  The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight is shown by the solid curve in FIG. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is operated, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the change amount of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (that is, the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 The slope of the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a) with respect to the manipulated value (resistance value) becomes a curve that decreases smoothly toward the value 0. As shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 118 (a), when the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated, the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. However, in the resistance value 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, it decreases by about 0.37% with respect to the rotation operation of the rotation angle 27 °, and the rotation angle in the resistance value 10Ω to 20Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. It decreases by about 0.25% with respect to the turning operation of 27 °, and decreases by about 0.16% with respect to the turning operation of the turning angle of 27 ° in the resistance value range of 20Ω to 30Ω of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0, and the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0. In the resistance value range of 30 Ω to 40 Ω, the brightness is reduced by about 0.11% with respect to the rotation operation of the rotation angle of 27 °. When the resistance value of the rm SDVR0 is 40Ω to 50Ω, it is reduced by about 0.08% with respect to the turning operation of the rotation angle of 27 °, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is of the resistance value of 50Ω to 60Ω with respect to the turning operation of 27 °. Decrease by about 0.06%, and in the resistance value 60Ω to 70Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, about 0.05% decrease with respect to the turning operation of the rotation angle 27 °, and in the resistance value 70Ω to 80Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is decreased by about 0.04%, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is decreased by about 0.09% in the resistance value range of 90Ω to 100Ω.

  In the present embodiment, the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted in the backlight brightness adjustment work is approximately 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Then, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted. In this case, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight is as shown in FIG. When the curve becomes a solid line, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, is about 38Ω.

  By the way, in the hall, since a plurality of pachinko game machines are lined up in the back of the pachinko island equipment, the internal temperature of the pachinko island equipment gradually increases after the start of business. Therefore, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 that is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight is about 38Ω described above. Even if adjusted, the brightness also changes due to temperature drift. For example, immediately after the opening of the hall, the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility is low at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work, and the resistance value is reduced by 5%, so that the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work. When the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a) at the temperature moves downward to become the alternate long and short dash curve in FIG. 118 (a), the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 72 with respect to the maximum rated brightness. It becomes smaller than 0.5%. When the hall starts operating and the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility rises to the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is changed by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). It is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness. Then, the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility further rises, and if the resistance value increases by 5%, the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a) at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work moves upward. When the curve of the broken line 118 (a) is obtained, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes larger than approximately 72.5% with respect to the maximum rated brightness.

  Here, the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g including the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 which are fixed resistors and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor is used as a resistor SDR6 'which is a fixed resistor and a brightness adjustment which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. Consider a brightness adjustment circuit 3425g 'configured by electrically connecting the volume SDVR0' and the volume SDVR0 'in series. The brightness adjustment circuit 3425g ′ is electrically connected in series with the variable terminal of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, which is a semi-fixed variable resistance, and the other end of the resistor SDR6 ′, which is a fixed resistance whose one end is grounded. The fixed terminal of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 ′, which is a fixed variable resistor, is electrically connected to the If adjusting terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f. As described above, when the current flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA so as not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA) of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, a fixed resistance is obtained. The combined resistance RSENS ′ composed of the resistance SDR6 ′ and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ that is a semi-fixed variable resistance is about 12Ω to 20Ω. When 10Ω is selected as the fixed resistor SDR6 ′, 10Ω must be selected as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′. The 10Ω semi-fixed variable resistor is not a general-purpose product, is not easily available and is expensive, and the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 0Ω (zero Ω) to the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is rotated toward 10Ω, the linear resistance has a characteristic that the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS ′ with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes constant.

  Temporarily, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, and the brightness adjustment volume in the solid line curve of FIG. 118 (a). The brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of SDVR0 is 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value is the same, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 10Ω which is the maximum resistance value. The brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at a certain time and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the solid curve in FIG. 118A is 100Ω which is the maximum resistance value. And are the same, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is As described above, when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value, it is about 45% with respect to the maximum rated brightness, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is the maximum resistance value. When the value is 10Ω, the maximum rated luminance is about 85%.

  Then, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is rotated from the minimum resistance value 0Ω (zero Ω) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ toward the maximum resistance value 10Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, the rotation operation is performed. Since the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS ′ with respect to the operation amount of is always constant, the combined resistance RSENS ′ does not have the curved shape shown in FIG. That is, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 changes from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, to 10Ω, which is the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, toward the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. 'Becomes a characteristic straight line that changes linearly from about 45% to about 85% with respect to the maximum rated luminance as a result of being rotated. The total amount of change in the brightness of the backlight is about 40%.

  Assuming that the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ has a rotation angle of 0 ° to 270 ° similarly to the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the slope of the straight line with respect to the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 0.148% (= about 40% / 270 °). In the case where the resistance value of the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g ′ including the resistance SDR6 ′ that is a fixed resistance and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ that is a semi-fixed variable resistance increases by 5% due to temperature drift, The brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is increased by 5% by moving the above-mentioned characteristic line upward, while if the resistance value is reduced by 5% due to temperature drift, the above-mentioned characteristic line is By moving downward, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced by 5%. On the other hand, in the brightness adjusting circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, the brightness adjusting volume is set so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes about 72.5% in the solid curve of FIG. 118 (a). If the resistance value of SDVR0 is adjusted to about 38Ω and the resistance value is increased by 5% due to the temperature drift to form the broken line curve in FIG. 118 (a), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed. The brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at this resistance value is about 40Ω, which is about 77% and about 4.5% larger, while the resistance value is temporarily reduced by 5% due to the temperature drift. ), The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes about 36Ω, and the sub liquid at this resistance value Next luminance of the backlight of the display device 3450 is about 68%, about 4.5% smaller.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the temperature drift occurs, the above-mentioned characteristic curve moves upward or downward, but the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about ± 4.5. %, The resistance SDR6 ′, which is a fixed resistance, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, which is a semi-fixed variable resistance, are electrically connected in series to each other in the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g ′. Compared with the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 (within ± 5%), the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be suppressed to 10%. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the brightness of the backlight due to the temperature change (temperature drift).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the solid line in FIG. 118 (a) at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight. According to the curve of, the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 85%, and even if the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility rises due to temperature drift, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes maximum. It is about 90% of the rated brightness. In other words, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 does not reach the maximum rated brightness even if temperature drift occurs.

  By the way, as a technique having the brightness adjusting circuit 3425g 'configured by electrically connecting the above-described resistor SDR6' which is a fixed resistor and the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 'which is a semi-fixed variable resistor in series, For example, a game machine has been proposed in which a player can freely adjust the brightness of a backlight that illuminates a rotating reel according to his / her preference (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-267899 (paragraph [0035], and (Fig. 4)). In the gaming machine described in this document, the fixed resistance and the variable resistance are electrically connected in series to form a circuit, so that the resistance value of the variable resistance can be changed by operating the operation unit. Accordingly, the resistance value of the combined resistance of the fixed resistance and the variable resistance is also changed so that the brightness of the backlight can be adjusted. By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, as described above, the fixed resistance and the variable resistance are electrically connected in series to form a circuit, and the change amount of the resistance value of the variable resistance is the resistance of the combined resistance. As the operation value is changed from the minimum resistance value to the maximum resistance value, the relationship between the resistance value of the variable resistance and the brightness of the backlight is It becomes a straight line in which the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value is always constant. Then, since the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the variable resistor is always constant, the resistance value of the variable resistor sharply changes with a small amount of operation of the operation unit before and after the target resistance value of the variable resistor. There is a problem in that it fluctuates and it becomes difficult to finely adjust the brightness of the backlight.

[11-3. Backlight brightness adjustment work]
Next, the brightness adjustment work of the backlight will be described. This backlight brightness adjustment work is performed before the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is an unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that has never been mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Not only is this performed when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused. Note that when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 that has driven the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is discarded, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has not been mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 yet and is unused. A sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is used.

  The backlight brightness adjustment work is performed by an operator of the manufacturer in the backlight brightness adjustment work process. The process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight is performed by using various jigs and various devices fixed to the workbench. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), a mounting base ARL to which the luminance measuring device MOL is attached, a jig ARSL to which the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached, and a sub liquid crystal drive for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. A jig ARSD for mounting the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 in which the substrate 3425 is housed is fixed to the workbench respectively. The measurement surface of the luminance measuring device MOL attached to the mounting table ARL faces the center of the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL, and the measurement of the luminance measuring device MOL attached to the mounting table ARL is performed. The mounting base ARL and the jig ARSL are respectively fixed to the work table so that the distance dimension between the surface and the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL becomes a predetermined distance d. The brightness measured by the brightness measuring device MOL is displayed on a brightness display (not shown). The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL is electrically connected to various wirings from the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD is also electrically connected to a wiring from a controller (not shown) for drawing the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in white. ing.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 accommodates the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 between a base member and a cover member combined with the base member, and the cover member and the base member are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. ing. The cover member is provided with an adjustment hole 3430a into which an adjustment tool for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 can be inserted, and the various wirings described above are electrically connected. And a plurality of vent holes for cooling the internal air of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 are formed along the upper side and the lower side, respectively.

  The operator of the manufacturer operates a controller (not shown) to transmit drawing data for drawing the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in white to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430. The drive substrate 3425 draws the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in one white color. Then, for example, when using (newly using) the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that has not been used even once, the manufacturer operator adjusts the formation of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The adjustment tool is inserted through the hole 3430a and fitted into the recess SDVR0a (see FIG. 118 (d)) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 housed in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, and the brightness not shown. Rotate while watching the brightness displayed on the display. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes about 38Ω, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f detects the white LED of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (white LED of the first stage (first) white LED). ~ By adjusting the current If flowing through the final stage (eighth) to the current at the time of new use adjustment, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. It becomes about 72.5%. Since the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 is rotated by inserting an adjusting tool into the adjusting hole 3430a formed in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, a finger is put into the adjusting hole 3430a to directly touch the adjusting hole 3430a. You can't do it. In other words, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall, even a clerk or the like in the hall cannot rotate the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0.

  The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment work of the backlight is shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). In this case, the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is operated to adjust the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes about 72.5%. There is a need. As described above, the inclination of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the rotation angle 27 in the resistance value 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. In the resistance value range of 10Ω to 20Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the value decreases by about 0.37% with respect to the rotation operation of 27 °, and decreases by about 0.25% with respect to the rotation operation of the rotation angle of 27 °. In the resistance value range of 20Ω to 30Ω, the rotation angle is decreased by about 0.16% for the rotation operation of 27 °, and in the resistance value range of 30Ω to 40Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the rotation value is decreased to about 0 for the rotation operation of 27 °. As the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the minimum, When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), the change amount of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the operation amount of rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed to the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value of about 38Ω, the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 increases and the brightness adjustment is performed. The resistance value of the volume SDVR0 can gradually approach the target resistance value of about 38Ω. That is, in the present embodiment, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotating operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 smoothly decreases. Therefore, the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be increased as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value.

  Now, let us consider a brightness adjusting circuit 3425g 'configured by electrically connecting the resistor SDR6', which is a fixed resistor, and the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 ', which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, which are electrically connected in series, as described above. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is constant at about 0.148%, the operator of the manufacturer recommends that the resistance of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 be Even if the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is quickly adjusted so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is obtained. It is difficult to adjust because the target resistance value cannot be approached. On the other hand, in the brightness adjusting circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, as described above, as the resistance value of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 responds to the rotating operation of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight is smoothly reduced, the slope is slightly large before reaching the target resistance value (0Ω (zero Ω) in the resistance value 0Ω to 30Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0). The slope in the -10 Ω section is the largest, the slope in the 10 Ω to 20 Ω section is the next largest, and the slope in the 20 Ω to 30 Ω section is large), and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is quickly reached to the front of the target resistance value (about 30 Ω). It can be brought close to the target resistance value (about 30Ω) When approaching, the slope becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value (the slope after the resistance value 30Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value), and the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes By increasing the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 as it approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought closer to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform fine adjustment of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  In addition, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused, the maximum of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has already been set in the brightness adjusting work step of the backlight. Although the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38Ω so as to be about 72.5% of the rated brightness, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 8Ω. Assuming that the brightness is deteriorated by about%, the worker of the manufacturer has to work while looking at a brightness display (not shown) on which the brightness measured by the brightness measuring device MOL is displayed. The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness is about 72.5%. However, actually, according to the solid line curve of FIG. 118 (a), the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is set to be about 80.5% with respect to the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The resistance value will be adjusted to about 65Ω.

  That is, assuming that the performance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated, the current If flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is increased as compared with the case of newly using the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Therefore, it is necessary to restore the brightness to that at the time of new use. For this reason, the manufacturer operator needs to increase the resistance value from the resistance value (about 38Ω) at the variable position of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 adjusted when the brightness of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is adjusted to increase the brightness value. The adjustment volume SDVR0 will be rotated. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes about 64Ω, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f operates as a white LED of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (white LED of the first stage (first) white LED). ~ By adjusting the current If flowing through the final stage (eighth) to a current during reuse adjustment which is larger than a current during new use adjustment, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be adjusted. The actual maximum brightness of the backlight is set to 72.5%. According to the solid-line curve in FIG. 118 (a), the current during reuse adjustment shows that the white LED of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (white of the first stage (first) white) when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used. When the current If flowing from the LED to the final stage (eighth) is adjusted by the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes about 80.5%. If the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated by more than about 8% and about 10%, the manufacturer operator displays the brightness measured by the brightness measuring device MOL. Since the work is performed while looking at the brightness display (not shown), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is set to the target resistance so that the brightness is approximately 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Even if the value is adjusted to about 38Ω, the solid line curve in FIG. 118 (a) actually shows that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 82.5%. In addition, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to about 76Ω.

[11-4. Variation in brightness adjustment]
Next, variations in brightness adjustment will be briefly described. In the above-described backlight brightness adjustment work process, for example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used, the manufacturer's worker needs to adjust the adjustment hole formed in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The adjustment tool is inserted from 3430a and fitted into the recess SDVR0a (see FIG. 118 (d)) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 accommodated in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, and then the sub liquid crystal display device. The rotating operation is performed while watching the brightness displayed on a brightness display (not shown) so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the 3450 becomes about 72.5%.

  Therefore, as the luminance distribution with respect to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted by such a rotating operation, the average value μ (mu) is 72.5%, the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma). ) Is 1%, the range of the variation 6σ of the brightness adjustment is 69.5% to 75.5% according to the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). When this range is projected onto the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 axis side with respect to the solid curve of FIG. 118 (a), as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the range from −3σ to μ, that is, the brightness with respect to the maximum rated brightness is obtained. In the section from 69.5% to 72.5%, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W0 in which the resistance value is variable from about 31Ω to about 38Ω, and the section from μ to + 3σ, that is, with respect to the maximum rated brightness. In the section where the brightness is 72.5% to 75.5%, the section W1 is where the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is variable from about 38Ω to about 46Ω. The range in the section W0 is about 7Ω from about 31Ω to about 38Ω, while the range in the section W1 is about 8Ω from about 38Ω to about 46Ω, so the range in the section W0 is the range of the section W1. It is getting smaller. This is because, as described above, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). A curve, that is, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated toward the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation. This is because it has the characteristic of changing in a curved shape that decreases.

  As described above, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that is adjusted by rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight brightness adjustment work process is used. When the luminance distribution with respect to the maximum rated luminance is considered to be a normal distribution with an average value μ (mu) of 72.5% and a standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) of 1%, the resistance of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 The value is a section from about 31 Ω to about 46 Ω, that is, section W0 + section W1, and when converted into a rotation angle by the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, as described above, the resistance value per rotation angle 1 ° Can be varied by about 0.37Ω, so that it becomes about 84 ° to about 124 °, and as shown in FIG. The range NR of the rotation angle when using the regulation is about 40 °.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused, the sub liquid crystal display is already used in the backlight brightness adjustment work process. Although the resistance value of the brightness adjusting volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the device 3450 is about 72.5%, the deterioration is about 8%. Assuming that the brightness of the backlight of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 to be reused is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness, the worker of the manufacturer rotates the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Then, actually, according to the solid curve of FIG. 118 (a), it is about 80.5% with respect to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. As described above, the adjusting the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 approximately 65 ohms. Even when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the average value μ (is calculated as the brightness distribution with respect to the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that is adjusted by rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Considering a normal distribution in which the (mu) is 80.5% and the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) is 1%, the range of the variation 6σ of the brightness adjustment is as shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). It becomes 77.5% -83.5%. When this range is projected onto the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 axis side with respect to the solid curve of FIG. 118 (a), the range from −3σ to μ, that is, the brightness with respect to the maximum rated brightness is from 77.5% to 80.5%. In the section, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W0 ′ in which the resistance value is variable from about 53Ω to about 65Ω, and the section from μ to + 3σ, that is, the brightness with respect to the maximum rated brightness is 80.5% to 83. In the section up to 5%, there is a section W1 ′ in which the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is variable from about 65Ω to about 82Ω. The range in the section W0 ′ is about 12Ω from about 53Ω to about 65Ω, while the range in the section W1 ′ is about 17Ω from about 65Ω to about 82Ω. It is smaller than the range of W1 '. This is because, as described above, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). A curve, that is, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated toward the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation. This is because it has the characteristic of changing in a curved shape that decreases.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the maximum brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, which is adjusted by rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight brightness adjustment work process, is adjusted. Assuming that the luminance distribution is a normal distribution in which the average value μ (mu) is 80.5% and the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) is 1%, the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 53Ω. It becomes a section up to about 82Ω, that is, a section W0 ′ + a section W1 ′, and when this is converted into a rotation angle by the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, as described above, the resistance value per rotation angle 1 ° is Since it can be changed by about 0.37Ω, it becomes about 143 ° to about 221 °, and as shown in FIG. 118 (d), at the time of reuse. The rotation angle range RR in this case is about 78 °, which is about twice the rotation angle range NR (about 40 °) at the time of new use. That is, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used or reused, although the average value μ (mu) of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 differs, the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma). If the distribution is considered to be a normal distribution with 1%, the rotation angle range RR at the time of reuse becomes about twice as large as the rotation angle range NR at the time of new use. When the liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, in the backlight brightness adjustment work process, in comparison with the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight brightness adjustment work process when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used. Then, the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is determined by the resistance of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Since the value can be further increased as it approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought closer to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy.

  In other words, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used or reused, the backlight white LED (the first stage (first) white LED to the last stage (8th)) of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is used. Although the flowing current If is different between the new use adjusting current and the reuse adjusting current, the amount of change in the new use adjusting current in the rotation angle range NR during new use and the rotation angle range RR during reuse are different. And the amount of change in the current at the time of reuse adjustment at the same time, and the amount of operation of rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 at the time of reuse compared to the amount of operation of rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 at the time of new use. Can be made larger. Therefore, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, even if the performance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated, the new use adjustment current in the rotation angle range NR during new use is adjusted. And the amount of change in the current during reuse adjustment in the range of the rotation angle RR during reuse are the same, and the amount of change is compared with the amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 during new use. By increasing the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 during use, it is possible to easily perform fine adjustment of the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  By the way, a plurality of high-intensity white LEDs are used for the backlight of the liquid crystal display device, each LED is electrically connected to the driver IC through a current limiting resistor, and the CPU PWM-controls the driver IC. Therefore, a game machine for adjusting the brightness of the backlight has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-152227 (paragraphs [0034], [0035], and FIG. 7)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, the current flowing through the high-intensity white LED is set by the current limiting resistor, so that if the performance of the LED deteriorates over time, the brightness of the backlight decreases. Will be done. When the liquid crystal display device is reused, the current flowing through the LED needs to be increased in order to increase the brightness of the backlight. Therefore, the current limiting resistor has to be removed, and the brightness of the backlight needs to be adjusted. The problem arises that it cannot be done easily.

  In the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, the variable position of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 adjusted when adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 at this variable position). As the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the sub-liquid crystal for the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 changes from about 38Ω. Since the slope of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the display device 3450 is smoothly reduced, the slope is slightly large before approaching the target resistance value (30Ω out of the resistance value 30Ω to 60Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. The slope is the largest in the 40Ω section, and then 40Ω The slope in the 0Ω section is large, and the slope in the 50Ω to 60Ω section is large), and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly approached to the front of the target resistance value (about 60Ω), and the front of the target resistance value (about 60Ω). 60Ω), the inclination becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value (the inclination of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 after the resistance value 60Ω becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value), and the operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is performed. By increasing the amount as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy. Therefore, even when the manufacturer operator adjusts the brightness of the backlight of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the brightness of the backlight can be easily adjusted.

[12. Commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. FIG. 119 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 120 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 120, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout, transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described, and the main control Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301, When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 119 (a). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. In the command 10H, one prize ball is provided. The command 11H specifies two prize balls, and the command 1EH specifies 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as a rental ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall), When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the payout is performed from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H, ... In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  A command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine as shown in FIG. 119 (c), and the self-check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as the confirmation of the command reception is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, normal electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 120, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display device 1185, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start, the special symbol 1 designation, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end, and the command of the state designation during fluctuation is configured. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for specifying a deviant, a specific big hit, or a non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[12-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 120, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 120, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (of the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 95). It is for instructing the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the special winning opening 1 between rounds (the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 rounds are being closed or start of closing), and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been detected (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97, The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted, and the big hit ending command is a big hit end Is intended to instruct the grayed start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing to start the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open). The small hit count display command is for the small hit medium big winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). The prize winning opening 2103 is opened) and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is closed), and the big winning is received. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is a count switch). 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is It is sent when the small hit ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 120, the category of power-on is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned with "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is to instruct the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated. ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when the power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, a main control side power-on process described below is executed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[12-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 120, the normal pattern display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the container 1189, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing to start the universal figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the ordinary pattern designating command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 95 which is opened / closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97, and is divided into sections as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called "Opening per figure", "Opening of universal communication", and "Ending per figure". A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (the pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted at the start of the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (the pair of movable pieces 2106 is driven by the starter solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 121, the notification display category is made up of commands such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of “6 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The prize abnormality display command is for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the special winning opening is won during the big winning (condition device is operating) When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is for instructing the start of the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection of the Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 97.

  The door opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 based on the detection signals (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, which are input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the door open notification is instructed. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is in a state of being closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. When it is in the state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command among the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the count switch 2110. , Which is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the door opening command is issued when a door opening is detected (door frame opening). Based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame Is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3), and the door closing command is detected when door closing is detected ( Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame 3 is in a state of being closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. Status)). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 121, the status display section is composed of commands having the names of frame status 1, error release navigation, and frame status 2. A status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 121, “7 * H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7 * H” to the received commands. Is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame status 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 121, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command directs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal control section 4160, the liquid crystal output board 3420, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 shown in FIG. Various boards such as the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

  As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and when it is other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when the power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, a main control side power-on process described below is executed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 121, starting mouth prize, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command called special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, and Based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109, the start of the production when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 is respectively instructed, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command changes from the fluctuation shortening operating state. It is for instructing the state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol. 1 hold 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 95, and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 has not yet displayed the variable display of the special symbol. The number of balls that have not been used (the number of reserves) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0-4 special symbols 2 pending (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 95). The special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol (the number of reserves), and the ordinary symbol storage command is 0-4 regular symbols 1 reserved. (The game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 95 and conveys the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 of the function display substrate 1191 (the number retained). Before the special symbol 1 hold is used for variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is prefetched and based on the special symbol 1 hold. The special symbol display 1185 is for instructing a pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is a special symbol 2 hold special function display substrate 1191 under the special symbol display device 1186. Before being used for variable display of the symbols, it pre-reads and instructs the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display device 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting mouth 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting mouth switch 3022, or a lower starting mouth switch). When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the 2109), the side speakers 130, 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left shown in FIG. The main speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been exhausted. The high-probability end designation command is sent at the time (after the elapse of the outage stop period), and the stop period ends after the fluctuation is confirmed by using the high-probability number in the case of "high probability N times". (After the stoppage period has elapsed), the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol display on the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a number of reserves not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol at 1185, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the number of reserves increases, the special symbol display from the number of reserves. It is transmitted to the variable display of the special symbol in 1185 when the number of holdings is reduced), and the special symbol 2 memory command is the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102). Then, in the state where there is a pending number which is not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191, the gaming ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the number of pending increases. When, or when the number of holding decreases when the number of holding decreases by using the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 from the number of holding), the normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change time (In the state where the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the normal symbol display device 1189 of the function display substrate 1191 has the number of holdings which is not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball further passes through the gate portion 2350. When the number of holding increases, and when the number of holding decreases when the number of holding decreases from the number of holding normally used for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189), the special symbol 1 memory read-ahead effect command is special. It is transmitted when the number of symbols 1 operation holding ball increases (when the number of holding balls increases when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101), the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command increases the number of special symbols 2 operation holding balls It is transmitted at the time of addition (when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the number of holdings increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is, when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). When a game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of the above), the fact is announced mainly by voice from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 are used to notify by voice and also used to monitor the presence or absence of cheating. It is designed to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 can be used as voice. Some specifications do not notify.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, which are frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command provides a ball out, full tank, over 50 stocks, abnormal connection, and no CR connection. Bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) when the ball is out. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1 when full, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1 in 50 or more stocks, bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

  The error clear navigation command has a ball gaze, a counting switch error, and a retry error. The value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2) for a ball gaze, and the value is set in bit 3 (B3) for a counting switch error. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, the "count switch error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 98 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation is repeated. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command include B0 with a value of 0, B1 with a value of 0, B5 with a value of 0, and B6 with a value of 1, The value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, the inside of the ball is prepared, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the inside of the ball. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[13. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 125 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value updating type counter (range closer to the maximum value side), and FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value updating type counter (minimum). It is the range closer to the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state, and a big hit determination initial value determination used to determine the initial value of this big hit determination random number For random number, reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to reach (out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. 97. Random display pattern random numbers to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the symbol display device 1186, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when the jackpot gaming state is generated. Random numbers for big hit symbols to be used to determine the big hit symbols to be derived and displayed, and big hit symbols to be used to determine the initial value of this random number for big hit symbols Random number for initial value determination, small hitting symbol random number for use in determining the small hitting symbol derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when generating the small hitting game state, this small A random number for determining the initial value of the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the winning symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol used for determining whether to open / close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 95, and an initial value for the random number for determining a normal symbol are determined. Normal symbol per use determination initial value determination random number for use, and normal symbol variation display pattern random number for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from the minimum value to the maximum value 0 to the maximum value 32767 in the present embodiment). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for determining initial value for ordinary symbol determination is also the same as the above-described updating method of the large-hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, as described above, for the jackpot determination initial value determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. In FIG. 97, the checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored when the power was turned off does not match, the jackpot judgment The initial value determination random number is a fixed numerical value range of a counter for extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 97 and updating the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived by using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by storing the code, the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM. The second security measure for deriving the same fixed value and the two-step security measure for prevent analysis.

  Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for illegally acquiring and updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value can be grasped, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. In other words, in the other game board 4 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value match is completely different from that of the game board 4 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko game machine 1', and is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals, and at each of the predetermined intervals, even if the player is aiming for a starting winning prize in which a game ball is inserted into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. The game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
As shown in FIG. 158, the initial value update type counter fetches the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when RAM is cleared). An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value in the first cycle. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained in the lottery toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value toward the value obtained in the lottery. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained from the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination updates the predetermined fixed numerical value range from the value 0 as the minimum value to the value 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. It is set.

  Here, as a range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), a value 10 to a value 209 is set at a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set at a high probability. As shown in, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. Will be set to. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value updating type counter becomes 0 to the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) of, the former period has a much lower probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (the value 209 for the low probability and the value 339 for the high probability) in the range (the big hit determination range) of the big hit determination value. And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter one. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started up by illicitly acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the electric wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. When a cheating act is performed that pretends to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting mouth 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the values in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is set from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value side, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0, before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period from the time of reaching the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). Comparing with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is extremely higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, the value before the first value in the range of big hit determination values (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). When comparing the range from the first value (low probability value 32668, high probability value 31768) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values will be the value that was randomly selected by the initial value selection process and will be set in the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination described above. It will count up and then count up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained from the lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the middle value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side. When the value is set to a range close to, the value (the low hit value) before the first value in the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (low hit value) The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is raised by illicitly acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the electric wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to have entered the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the ranges of the big hit judging value (big hit judging range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value, as shown in FIGS. 158 and 159. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. In the third cycle from the time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. . In the fourth cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the initial value updating type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity The player will not be able to detect it.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  After step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. It Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 has been operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear switch 4100e is cleared. A value 0 is set to the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”). It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when erasing game information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Wait timer processing 2 is performed following step S18 or step S20 (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S22, it is determined whether the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S26, whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not (step S28). When they match, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed.

  When the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, the work area of the main control internal RAM is set as the power recovery (step S32). . In this setting, the value 0 is set in the backup flag BK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The term "power recovery" means that the power is turned on from the power-off state, the power is restored from a power failure or momentary interruption, and the high frequency is detected and reset. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, power-on command generation processing is performed (step S34). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or the checksum value (sum value) is matched in step S28. If not, or if the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, if the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the main control internal RAM Is cleared (step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the jackpot determination random number, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information, when the thumb values do not match Alternatively, when the power-off process on the main control side is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the jackpot determination random number is based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating is executed, and this fixed value is set.

  Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). In this setting, the initial information is read from the ROM with built-in main control and this initial information is set in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

  Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S40). In the RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 120 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and the peripheral The test commands divided into the test-related items shown in FIG. 121 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Following step S42, interrupt permission setting is performed. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

  Following step S44, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal as the power failure notification is the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Input from. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure notice signal is input in step S48, non-winning random number updating processing is performed (step S50). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated. The random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win / win random number updating process.

  After step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and it is determined in step S48 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and the power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the starting opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display device 1185, the lower special symbol display device 1186, the upper special symbol memory display device 1184, and the lower special symbol memory display device 1187 shown in FIG. , The normal symbol display device 1189, the normal symbol memory display device 1188, the game state display device 1183, the round display device 1190 and the like are stopped the drive signal (step S54).

  Following step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Following step S58, clear setting of the watchdog timer is performed (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

[13-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 123 and 124.

  When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 125 (step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Following step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). The interrupt cycle is initialized by clearing this interrupt flag, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. 95, the big winning opening shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entered in 2103, the upper start opening switch shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entered in the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. The detection signal from 3022, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97 which detects the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 95, and the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97 that detects a game ball, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 for notifying that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later is read, and the input information is input information. Store in the storage area. Further, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101 and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding starting mouth winning commands shown in FIG. 121 and corresponding thereto are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, The starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are processed for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Since this is possible, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary symbol described below and In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 normally sends various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). The time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variable display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control RAM as time management information.

  Following step S76, a random number updating process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 124, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so that each time the winning random number updating process is performed, each counter Will count up. For example, the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is an initial value update type counter, as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number, normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this winning random number update process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random number updating method, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number, the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 124 (main control Side main processing), the non-winning random number updating processing in step S50 and the winning random number updating processing in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are respectively updated, but this routine is executed each time an interrupt timer occurs. When the number of times the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 is executed is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time , A big hit determination initial value determination random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determination random number in step S5 Or as a mechanism to only update the non Toraku random number update processing.

  Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 119 for paying out the game balls based on this input information is created, or with the main control board 4100. The self-check command shown in FIG. 119 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, the information is sent to the payout control board 4110.

  Following step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer main serial data, the information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM. . Further, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 121 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status command) State 2 command)) is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Following step S82, fraudulent activity detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the big hit game state is not entered (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2103), etc. The abnormal winning state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 121 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Following step S84, special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is extracted and coincides with the jackpot determination value stored in the main control ROM beforehand (big hit). Judgment whether to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the big hit symbol, and the probability variation hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination as to whether or not a probability change occurs). Here, the “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. The value 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability change time determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match each other. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper starting opening switch 3022, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 120 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower starting opening switch 2109. The various special command 2 synchronization effect related commands shown in FIG. 120 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 or according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so as to light the lower special symbol display 1186, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 120 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 95 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state twice (round), Turn on the two-round display lamp 1190a of the round display 1190 shown in 91. The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15-round display lamp 1190b of the round display 1190 shown in 89 is displayed. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set to be turned on, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and to the gaming state indicator 1183 to turn on or off the occurrence of probability variation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Following step S86, normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is performed (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In the gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control RAM. Remember.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set on the basis of, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened / closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified into those related to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 120 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display device 1189 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and as described above as the output information. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric power combination effect shown in FIG. 120. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number per normal symbol for determination does not match the normal symbol per determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol is based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. While storing in the transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display device 1189 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information described above as the output information. Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or a big hit game. In the state, in addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106. , 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals relating to the game are output to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 120 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot-related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronization effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric figure effect-related, shown in FIG. 121, Various commands classified into notification display, various commands classified into status display, various commands classified into test-related, and various commands classified into other are stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Following step S92, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). Since the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S94, the register is switched (restored) (step S96), and this routine ends. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process which is the present routine is started, the main control MPU 4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose registers in a hardware manner and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 144. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 128 is a payout control unit following FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a continuation of power-on processing, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of ball removal switch operation determination processing, and FIG. 131 is a rotation. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of a corner switch history creating process, FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball gaze determining process, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the process for adding the number of prize balls stock for a ball, and FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing, FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of payout ball removal determination setting processing, and FIG. 138 is a payout. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting process, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal setting process, FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball bending motion setting process, and FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a retry motion monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example, FIG. 142 is a flowchart which shows an example of an inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 143 is a flowchart which shows an example of an error release switch operation determination process, and FIG. 144 is a payout operation by ball lending. Signal processing (a), input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit (a) It is to the timing chart.

  First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball removal judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball ball movement setting processing, ball removal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing The mismatch counter reset determination processing and the error release switch operation determination processing will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball glide determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release switch operation determination process are one process of the main operation setting process of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. The ball removal switch operation determination process, the rotation angle switch history creation process, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process, the ball glide determination process, the retry operation monitoring process, the mismatch counter reset determination process, the error release switch operation determination process, Addition processing of the number of prize balls stock for prize balls, addition processing of the number of prize balls stock for ball rental, stock monitoring Management and priority in the order of dispensing ball vent determination setting process is set.

[14-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process, as shown in FIGS. 126 to 128. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, I / O port I / O port of the payout control MPU 4120a is set.

  Following step S502, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 107 is started (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or by comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal via the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 with its logic set to LOW. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop PIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 can be applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  After step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  Following step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 is stopped (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D type flip-flop PIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

  Following step S510, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512, the payout is issued. The value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in, for example, various flags and various information storage areas stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. Various information stored (for example, the number of prize ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area) Is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set) is set. When the payout information is deleted, the value is 1, the payout information. Is set to 0 when not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, a setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM is performed (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S526). . When they match, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit to be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

  When the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the process of powering off the payout control unit is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery time (step S530). ). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as the “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and this value is read. The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, when the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, Alternatively, in step S528, when the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the power-off process of the payout control unit is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared. Yes (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, a work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Following step S536, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Following step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as the power failure notification. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure notice signal is input in step S540, it is determined whether or not the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which will be described later every 1.75 ms, and has a value of 1. Each value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S544), and the external An external WDT clear signal is output to the watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c (ON, step S546). The external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped during the clear signal release time. Resetting is performed (the system of the payout control MPU4120a is regularly diagnosed as to whether or not it has runaway).

  Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information and payout motor 744 indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 119) are normally received. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to, the prize ball number information of the number of balls from which the payout motor 744 has actually paid out the game balls, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor 744 is output. To the driving signal, or the payout motor 744 actually pays out the game balls as the prize ball number information signal The error LED is output to the partial terminal board 784 (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 outputs an award ball number information signal to the external terminal board 784 every time 10 gaming balls are actually paid out). A display signal is output to the display device 860c.

  Subsequent to step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal. , A main payment ACK signal and the like from the main control board 4100 which informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, and stores them as input information in the input information storage area. ..

  Following step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer updating process, when the determination is made as to whether or not the ball blunting state by the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69. Time, full tank determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. The determination condition is used when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the switch 750. In addition to performing time management such as the set ball-out determination time, the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751. And, when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not paying out game balls that are inconsistent due to the mismatch of is set, the determination condition is set. Performs time management of the mismatch counter reset determination time. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, the ball-judging determination time is decremented by 1.75 ms each time this timer updating process is performed. The ball-blurring judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Every time this timer updating process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are decremented by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value 0. The ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication processing, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the signal logic state is set. By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 4120a, in the CR communication process, exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, a momentary power failure or a power failure and CR. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of game balls cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc., to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored, even if the power is interrupted or stopped. The various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved. Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of the I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in, for example, the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH on the basis of the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As the setting of the error status output to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6, pay a rental ball. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. Output to the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power recovery, so it is extremely effective after power recovery. At an early stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the CR unit 6 is awarded. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game balls by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery. In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, a CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, a pachinko game machine. When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected to each other through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, pachinko. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 86. When not electrically connected through, the PRDY signal logic state is set to LOW and the output of the payout control I / O port 4120b is transmitted in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. Output from the terminal to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 4110. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space 546 of the above-described foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 described above by a detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is a predetermined number or more. It is determined whether or not. For example, the determination whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the game balls stored is determined by the timer interruption period 1.75 ms in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing this time. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (1.75 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, the time counting of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. To determine. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, it is determined that the gaming ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full, and the full tank information indicating that is described above is the status information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the tank information storing area 546 stores full tank information indicating that the gaming space in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full tank state. To do.

  To determine whether the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 1.75 ms is used to check whether the tank is full or out of ball When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on in the process, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous full (1.75 ms before) and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection from the out-of-ball switch 750. When the signal transits from OFF to ON, the above-described out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer updating process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. To determine. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON, the out-of-ball information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is OFF, the fact that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number is notified. The out-of-ball information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 119) are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal, and ball scooping are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not more than the predetermined number based on this ball-out information, a corresponding display is made. Data (display value 1 (numeral "1") in this embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame) classified into the state display shown in FIG. State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 command Is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Following step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (OFF, step S568). This clears the external WDT 4120c so that the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are not reset. When the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped, the external WDT 4120c starts measuring the clear signal release time.

  After step S568, the process returns to step S540 again, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is determined in step S542. It is determined whether or not the value is 1. When the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set in step S544. 0 is set, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4120c in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and timer update processing is performed in step S552. The CR communication process is performed in S554, and the full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed in step S556. Command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, main operation setting processing in step S562, LED display data creation processing in step S564, command transmission processing in step S566, In step S568, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF), and steps S540 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S540 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected. Following step S570, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b via the payout control I / O port 4120b (step S572). As a result, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Following step S572, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped. Following step S574, the external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c to stop the output (ON / OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. Following step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated. Following step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Following step S580, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected. Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b for resetting. After that, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout control unit power-on process again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[14-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 126 to 128.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 129. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Following step S590, a value of 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Each value is set to 0 when 0.75 ms has not elapsed. Following step S592, register switching (return) is performed (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). The value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten by using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Following step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[14-3. Ball switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

  When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the ball removal switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. 130 (step S600). This determination is performed on the basis of the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S600, the input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is not operated.

  When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, a value 1 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. , Value 0 is set when the game ball is not discharged.

  Following step S602, the above-mentioned ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S604), and this routine is ended. When the ball removal determination time becomes valid, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated in step S600, this routine is finished as it is. The ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

[14-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 98 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 131. (Step S610). The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a shown in FIG. 70 for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotary member 748 changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. It is determined that the state has transitioned. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing is performed (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  Following step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing is performed (step S618). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is set to the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. To do.

  Following step S618, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine is ended.

  As described above, every time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is formed. The value of the least significant bit B0 is set according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit 749a transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in the state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748, and has a value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (skipping). When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when not skipped), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In step S630, when the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the pay-out built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit.” ”” In the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the value 0 and the lower 4. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit 749a described above is continuously detected by the light of the rotation angle switch 752 in four timer interrupt cycles. This means that the axis is in a state in which it transits from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 98 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotor 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but due to this backlash. Since the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps, in the present embodiment, when performing the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748, The history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 131, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. This is performed based on bits B3 to B0, that is, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 generated by the latest four timer interrupt cycles. . As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 is rotated by four steps, so that it is rotated more than the rotation of the payout rotor 748 due to the backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotor 748 due to the backlash is absorbed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the fixed position determination skip flag. The value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 can be set not to be performed (skipped). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

  Following step S636, the skip determination time is set valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the detection slits 749a are three in the same number as the recesses 748a of the pay-out rotating body 748, and are formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting plate 749. There is. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotor 748) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The payout control MPU 4120a manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) the detection slit 749a has a transitional state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 transitions from the blocked state to the non-blocked state, and (2) the detection slit 749a. A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”), and (3) the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state. It is managed in three states: a state that has transited to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps. .

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit 749a is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time rotates the payout motor 744 by 13 steps. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction is 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the initial value 0.

  On the other hand, when the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is finished as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69, taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, and the prize ball device 740. Be led to. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. The rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from this rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the prize ball case inside board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit 749a from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752. In the state of transition to, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748. The cycle and the period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be calculated in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-6. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. This ball-blurring determination processing determines whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.

  When the ball head determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM to rotate from the rotation angle as shown in FIG. 133. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Following step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, And the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are included. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the detection slit 749a rotates. It is a state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotator 748 is rotating, and it is assumed that the ball-bulging state has not occurred, and this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing the overturning operation, the ball is 1 The value is set to 0 when only the operation is not performed.

  Following step S644, the ball entangling determination time is set to be valid (step S646), and this routine ends. When the ball gaze determination time becomes valid, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[14-7. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, a process for adding various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command described later. The process of adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and subsequently, the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In this embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for an award ball is performed. After the game balls have been paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[14-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command (step). S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 128. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information. In step S650, the received command information is read from this received command information storage area and it is determined whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, this routine is ended as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is set to the prize ball. It is read from the number information table (step S652). This award ball number information table is an information table, which will be described later in detail, is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

  Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. ing. Thereby, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The prize ball number PBV read in step S652 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and this routine is ended. The prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[14-7-2. Addition process for the number of prize balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball will be described. When this award ball stock number addition process for ball rental is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal, as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is made based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S660, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

  When there is no ball loan request signal in step S660, this routine is ended as it is, while when there is a ball loan request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control RAM. (Step S662), the number of lent balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of lent balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of lent balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the ball rental request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the award ball is prioritized (the award ball and the ball rental are separately managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[14-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, is the player not continuing the game during the game in a state where the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is filled with the game balls stored (stock state)? This is the process of monitoring.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. It is read (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S674), and this routine is ended. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the unpaid number of game balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH. Is a flag indicating that the warning threshold value has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the warning threshold value TH is exceeded or higher, and a value of 0 when the warning threshold value TH is not exceeded.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  When the game state becomes a big hit and the player is relaxed and pays attention to the effect unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 100, the player inadvertently pays out as a prize ball for one round. The played game ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls are collected in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, which is shown in FIG. 53 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be pulled out from the lower plate 302, and the player will fill the lower plate 302 (the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50, which is approximately one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the player's attention should be paid to the game as early as possible.

[14-9. Set-up determination process for payout balls]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 69. It is a process of setting whether to discharge the game balls stored in the tank rail 731 from the pachinko gaming machine 1, perform a ball bending operation, or do not perform such payout or discharge. .

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 rotates from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 137. The angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

  Following step S680, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 70 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, And the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are included. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether the FLG value is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating, and has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and a value when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , If the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0), that is, if the retry operation is not abnormal, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball in-between flag PBE-FLG is the value 1. Is determined (step S686). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing the overturning operation, the ball is 1 The value is set to 0 when only the operation is not performed.

  In step S686, when the value of the in-ball-sloping flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when the ball-sloping operation is not performed, the award ball information storage area of the payout control RAM described above is selected. The ball stock number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, is the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 filled with the stored game balls? It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is performed on the basis of the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main processing of the payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 128. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls stored therein.

  When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls in step S692, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, this routine is ended. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, whether the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 or not. Is determined (step S696). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. When the game balls are discharged, the value is 1, and the game balls are not discharged. At this time, the value is set to 0. The determination of step S696 is performed based on the determination result of step S600 in the ball-extracting switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when the operation signal (detection signal) from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is input, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination processing.

  When the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S696, that is, when the game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S698). ), And ends this routine. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

  Thus, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731. Is designed to be discharged. When this discharging is completed, the value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not value 1 (value 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is directly executed. finish. As a result, the game balls are neither paid out nor discharged.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the value of the in-ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the squinting operation is performed, squeezing operation setting processing which will be described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is ended. . In the ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step). S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  Following step S702, the error status output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, when the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the logic state of the PRDY signal is held, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Note that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

[14-9-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to set the payout of game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM, as shown in FIG. 138 (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination determines whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains based on the drive command number DRV.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 at step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read (step S718). The actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although detailed description will be given later, this count is performed by the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 70 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The value 0 is set to the real sphere count PB (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set as the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when the payout motor 744 has the number of game balls to be paid out, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, a value of 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decrement, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S728, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S730), and this routine ends. The actual ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is finished as it is. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented. Determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, in order to pay out the one ball that should be paid out again, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the drive command number DRV to the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in step S720 described above. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, in other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded up into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game ball will not be paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the unpaid game ball.

[14-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to perform a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69. Is.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether the ball removal determination time has elapsed (step S740). This determination is performed based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S740, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. The payout motor 744 performs the ball-removing operation during the ball-removal determination time. This ball removing operation discharges the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731.

  When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S740, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Following step S744, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S746), and this routine ends. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged, The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

[14-9-3. Ball-gaze operation setting process]
Next, the ball-bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70.

  When the ball-bending operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball-bending judgment time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140 (step S750). This determination is performed on the basis of the ball gaze determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

  When the ball deflection determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S752).

  Following step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, And the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are included. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, a ball bending motion is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout motor 744. The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Following step S758, the value "0" is set to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and this routine is ended. The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-bulb state due to the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing the overturning operation, the ball is 1 When the only motion is not performed (end of the ball motion), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Following step S762, the error status output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the value "0" is set to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S766), and this routine is ended.

[14-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM to switch the rotation angle switch as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

  Following step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the inconsistency counter INCC is displayed. Only the value 1 is added (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. It is a counter for playing, and usually, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match, so the value is It becomes 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 138. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotor 748 and paid out, and actually The number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. At times, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778).

  Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied gaming ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about several millionth, and in the present embodiment, it is inconsistent. The value 5 is set as the threshold value INCTH. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM of step S530 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 128, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control internal RAM when the power is restored. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until just before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of the power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the prize ball. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 740 is in a normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal even when the power is restored.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, it is indicated that there is a "retry error". In order to notify, the retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED display 860c which is the segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the above-mentioned state information storage area of the payout control RAM is set. Is set (stored) (step S782).

  Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or larger than the mismatch threshold INCTH. The initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. Incidentally, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, in response to the occurrence of this external factor. There is. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 erases all the various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and outputs the RAM clear notification command. Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It has become.

  Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry operation is When operating normally, the value is set to 0.

  Note that the payout control MPU 4120a sets the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566, a retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 4100. In the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c is created. The LED display information is stored in the output information storage area, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output processing of step S548 in the same process. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 which has received the status command transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100, a door frame side lighting blink command for outputting a lighting signal that causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the above to emit light in a predetermined color (in the present embodiment, red). It outputs and makes a plurality of LEDs emit light of a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED indicator 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Accordingly, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the clerk at the hall or the like checks the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860c are not notified, the operation can be performed extremely quickly.

  Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, the game ball received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out is made difficult to detect, and the retry operation is forcedly generated, Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, if the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 Since a plurality of LEDs of (1) emit light, a store clerk or the like in the hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or larger than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of the internal factor of becoming. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as the operation of the error cancellation switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 occurs. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is tampered with and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illicit act. There is no.

[14-11. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset processing, the difference between the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 71 is calculated. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the calculated inconsistency counter INCC.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed (see FIG. 142) ( Step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Following step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794), and this routine is ended. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value is 0 because the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and paid out is the same as the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 138. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received by the recess 748a of the payout rotor 748 and paid out, and actually The number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. With the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied gaming ball due to a retry operation will be paid out is about several millions. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the gaming board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the gaming board 4 is mounted. By exchanging the gaming board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specification can be changed, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, a drive power supply for the prize ball device 740, and a control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are generated in FIG. 78. The power supply board 851 shown in is mounted on the frame body side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine the abnormal operation whether the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the process of power-off control unit power-off in the process of power-on power-off of control unit shown in FIG. 128, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before power-off is stored when power-off, while the power-on power-out control unit shown in FIG. 127 is turned on. In the processing of step S530 in the time processing (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the processing is restarted from the stored mismatch counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the power is cut off and the gaming board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is replaced with a gaming board 4'having a different game specification from the gaming board 4 and the power is turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout controller 4120 on the board 4110 starts the process again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 was mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4'installed, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the pre-replacement gaming board 4 is inherited as it is. Therefore, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4'is mounted, and by chance, there is a probability of one in a few millions, and the number of unmatched gaming balls occurs, causing an inconsistency counter INCC. When the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′. May occur. In other words, in a period shortly after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ', malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Although the error does not occur, there is a possibility that the retry operation is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation. In this way, if the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 4 ′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 4 ′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out by the retry operation is one in several millions, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. In the case where the retry operation is inconsistent, it is the same as the probability that one ball is paid out. Therefore, in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, the value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2, 3 In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 4 by 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control MPU 4120a determines from the counting switch 751 in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that there is a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 141, in order to notify that there is a “retry error”, a number “” is displayed on the error LED display 860c which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. Set the retry error information to display "5" So that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths described above is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, or the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information that conveys the message from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  By intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and is paid out, and the retry operation is forcedly generated. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, in the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time, as described above, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is When the threshold value is equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk or the like in the hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, in the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is changed every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, during this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the mismatch counter INCC up to the mismatch threshold INCTH as described above, and the counting switch 751 is intentionally set. The number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who commits an illegal act can be extremely reduced even if the game machine is repeatedly deactivated for a long time.

[14-12. Error release switch operation determination processing]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination processing, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

  When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated as shown in FIG. 143 (step S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a. When the input information includes a detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a, it is determined that the error canceling switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error canceling switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error canceling switch 860a has not been operated.

  When the error canceling switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is ended as it is, while when the error canceling switch 860a is operated in step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normally operating). Since it is set, the payout control MPU 4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1.

  Following step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the state information corresponding to the error flag is set to The RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 128, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state information is read. Based on the above, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal, is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, an error occurs in the retry operation. When the retry error information indicating that is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 128. Then, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 125. A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcements of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." And "Please check the harness of the payout control board." By repeating the flow from the side speakers 130, 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. The clerk in the hall will be notified. Upon hearing the error notification announcement of this retry operation, the clerk or the like in the hall receives a malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Can be confirmed much earlier than when the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Following step S804, cancellation setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is handled. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 860c which is the segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey the above to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, in the activated state, and the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal, is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860c has already been displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for notifying that it is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control RAM described above is set to "normal". The information that the graphic "-" that informs that is displayed is forcibly overwritten. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is ready, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the ball lending device connection from the payout control I / O port 4120b is connected. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  Following step S806, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal, is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set. Initialize by setting 0. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the error release switch 860a is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process when the error occurs, that is the external factor. When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. It should be noted that the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[14-13. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls corresponding to 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls and the amount of 25 balls corresponding to 100 yen is paid out twice) is used as the number of lent balls. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the read input information by reading the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[14-13-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the ball. When the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set to the logical state, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the message, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, it is started up and held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY via the game ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on (turned on). The operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 as the TDS shown in FIG. 99 from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  The payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms) from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 144 (b). ) Elapses, a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, 100 yen as the amount of money in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like. It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out.

  The CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen among the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. As shown in), BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for playing balls etc. by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4120a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, It is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.), The EXS signal logic is set to HI, that is, the start-up state is held and the payout control I It is output from the / O port 4120b and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input has the lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H3. , BRQ which is started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). Then, a predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen, is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal started and held from the timing H3 is output as the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b with the logic set to LOW, that is, held in the lowered state. It outputs to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as game balls (timing H5).

  The CR unit 6 pays the remaining 100 yen of the game balls out of the number of 200 yen balls as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. As shown in), BRQ, from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board for the game ball, etc., from the timing H5 until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms). It outputs to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via 869, and raises and holds the signal (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls as the number of lent balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. 144 (c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while keeping its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 rises from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 144 (a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (set to 268 ms at maximum in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

  Note that the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is out, the counting switch error, the retry error, the full tank, or the like (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is Is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the PRDY signal that was started and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state of falling. The data is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is performed. It is output from the control I / O port 4120b, and is output to the CR unit 6 as the EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) to maintain its logic HI.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the lent number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A clerk in the hall operates a setting section (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to lend to the upper plate 301, When the payout control MPU4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount of money when set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money is set as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of balls of the game ball for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[14-13-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other rental device connection terminal board 869 even after the above-described loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not activated, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY and the CR unit 6 connects the lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, output to the payout control board 4110, when the signal is not lowered, or even when the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has passed, the CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 The output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the signal is not activated, or the case described above. Even if the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is stopped. If not, the PRDY and EXS described above are used to confirm whether or not BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and 144 (f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and then a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms ± 1 ms)), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is output as PRDY. , Outputs to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, sets the logic of the EXS signal to LOW, that is, holds the lowered state and outputs from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the EXS As a result, the data is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held from the timing J1 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JB (200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being kept in the started state, and is output to the CR unit 6 as PRDY via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J2 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output to the CR unit 6 as PRDY via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J3 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JD (100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J4 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JE (100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in a lowered state and is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held after being lowered from the timing J5, to HI, after a lapse of a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 which receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150 and 154 to 157. To do. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 147 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 148 is a flow chart, FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing, and FIG. 150 is a rotation detection switch history creation processing. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing. FIG. 157 shows the transformer for the sub liquid crystal. Tsu is a timing chart illustrating the timing for outputting the connection confirmation signal to the data IC of INIT terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, rotation detection. The switch history creation processing, the LOCKN signal history creation processing, the connection failure determination processing, and the connection recovery processing will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the LOCKN signal history creation process is performed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later. It is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110, and the connection failure determination process and connection recovery process are one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later. The connection recovery processing is executed, and the connection recovery processing is executed subsequently to the connection failure determination processing. In this embodiment, as the priority order of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 145. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral controller 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initialization processing includes processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, hot start / cold start determination processing, and processing for setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101, effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb thereof. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in is compared with the production backup information which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). 1 ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Production backup information (1fr) and production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms), are copied back to perform a hot start, while comparing When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 101, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is the storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to wear it.

  Following step S1000, current time information acquisition processing is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and displays the liquid crystal display so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1900 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in the range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and is currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to turn on the LED, and the LEDs included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 are included. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the luminance of 80%, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed at all. Has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done. In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. When not executed, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control to be described later, which is executed in response to the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Following step S1006, it is determined whether the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the value of this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), it returns to step S1008 again and repeatedly determines whether the value of V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 or not. To do. By repeating such determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to output the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to reset it.

  When the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, first, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to perform serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port. When serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A game for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 and / or a plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The board-side light emission data SL-DAT is in a state of being created and set by the lamp data creation process described later. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the head address is passed through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is used). This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register and writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. One byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive board serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It has been created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a trigger (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). When the bus is not used, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , And decorating the frame via the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I / O port. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation (rotation direction of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. How to rotate the dial operation unit 401 by monitoring the operation of the unit 405 And it reflects the state of operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects whether appropriately determined.

  Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the display data creation process described later is displayed by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. Output from the device 1900 and / or the channel CH2 shown in FIG. 102 to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. It is designed to cancel the output to. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 by the lamp data output processing of step S1012. A speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and a door frame 5 are provided by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 53 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization of the effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 with music and sound effects that match various effects.

  Following step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in sound data creation processing described later is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data, and music and sound effects are output. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound or the notification sound is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having positive and negative signals. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method that is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the notification sound and the notification sound are stereo. It will be played.

  Following step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series constituting the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the beginning is emitted. The pointer is updated in order to instruct whether the mode is set.

  Further, in the scheduler update processing, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor / solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing so as to instruct the drive data originally instructed.

  Following step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101. , Analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 120 are classified into special command 1 tuning effect related commands, special command 2 tuning effect related commands, jackpot related commands, and power-on. Shown in FIG. 121, various commands classified into notification display, and status display shown in FIG. 121. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

  Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 121, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is displayed. Various control data of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, including the set screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 illustrated in FIG. 102 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 illustrated in FIG. When a problem occurs in the connection with the receiver, a connection recovery process, which will be described later, is carried out to eliminate the problem and restore the connection. Further, in the warning process, the liquid crystal is displayed during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed. Confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to perform the operation confirmation request of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output substrate built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 requests the LOCKN signal output. For sending data As a response signal, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU4150a, and when this LOCKN signal is input, it is considered that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has a problem. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that there is a problem in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. To that effect, a communication error display process (for example, a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") In the connection recovery process described later is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is controlled so that it is displayed on the There is a problem in the display device. ”) Is controlled to repeatedly flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5. At this time, the LED for light emission decoration and the game board provided in the door frame 5 are controlled. 4 may be controlled so that all the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in No. 4 may be turned on.). In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. As a result, it is possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that one abnormal condition occurs after another abnormal condition occurs and before the abnormal condition is resolved. You can

  Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and based on the light emission data pointed to by the pointer, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the light emission mode generation schedule data. , Lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 and / or a plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT to be output is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 41 Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is stored in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. set.

  Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control unit among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to generate the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or Alternatively, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Further, in this display data creation process, in the connection failure determination process described later executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024, from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117. Based on the history of the output LOCKN signal, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. When it is determined whether or not there is a problem with the connection, and when it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. ) And the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. And a screen (image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the screen (image) to be displayed on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is controlled to generate the screen (image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in the area. More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. In order to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020 to configure screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data arranged in time series, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and displays it in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Sprite data for one screen (for one frame) to be created is created, and sprite data for one screen (for one frame) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is created, and based on these sprite data. Then, the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is generated in the built-in VRAM. The generated rendering data of the composite screen (composite image) is output from the channel-incorporated-source VDP 4160a to the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. 102 in the display data output process of step S1016 described above. As a result, a composite screen (composite image) is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the present embodiment, when the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is generated, the sprite to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is the sprite displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The priority is set to be higher than the priority. As a result, even if sprite over occurs when generating drawing data for the composite screen (composite image), the liquid crystal is hidden by the sprite to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and cannot be visually recognized. The sprites displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 are only sprite-over, and the sprites to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 are always visible in the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM. It is supposed to be done.

  Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and is managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with the board volume 0 being set to mute and the board volume 6 being set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, the audio data is audio data that is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5. Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk or the like in the hall operates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are set. , 262, the effect sound such as music and sound effect is reduced, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble, or when the player is cheating, a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is generated). The notification sound set to () can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming liable to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertisement sound is generated. The volume of the sound is increased to add music and sound effects, and the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is rendered more powerful, and a game state advantageous for the player is obtained. You can also announce that you are likely to move.

  Following step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The effect information (1fr) that is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used as effect backup information (1fr) as Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1) in the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are requested to be requested by the MA controller 4150ac, and the copy of the backup first area 4150cb to Bank2 (1fr) is designated, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0. The contents up to the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to specify that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are copied in order from the first address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 101, that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed on the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM) in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150a is copied. Specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM). From the contents to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), all of the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 4150dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa to the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are transferred to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P, and backup second area 4150dc from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are sequentially copied from the top address of Bank4 (SRAM).

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing (step S1038), the process returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has value 0. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, step S1009. ~ The process of step S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing". This peripheral control unit steady process starts by setting a value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and executes the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010. After performing steps S1012, S1014, ..., And step S1036, and finally setting the value 0 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral controller steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Will be done. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the V blank signal VPD 4160a having the sound source built-in, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is input. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 100, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed in response to this will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the value of the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, as shown in FIG. (Step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  When the value of the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). ), And ends this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the value of the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process which is currently being executed is performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process on the way, the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. In step S1009 of the process at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady process), the value 1 is set to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. In addition to notifying the blank signal interrupt process, the peripheral control unit steady process is set by setting the value 0 to the steady process flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. 145. By transmitting the fact that the execution is completed to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the value of the steady processing in-process flag SP-FLG is determined in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. Is a value 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. You have me. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 next time. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 145. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[15-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is input. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  When it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is ended. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher priority as the interrupt processing priority. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. When the frame I / O driver board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is first set. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf for decorative driving amplifier board side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac uses this as a trigger whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the frame I / O board serial I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To transmit the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is used to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I / O port. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid are extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 4 shown in 101 Set to 50c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is stored). This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If there is not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Motor drive board serial I / O port By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Synchronously, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4.

  Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches ( For example, the rotation history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are created, and the operation of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. 101 is performed. It is set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is created, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 illustrated in FIG. 117 is abnormal. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 are connected. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 are acquired to obtain the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. You can get the drawing state of.

  After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101 occurs. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) each time. , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as effect backup information (1 ms), Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (in the backup first area 4150 cb). Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are requested by the MA controller 4150ac to specify that the backup first area 4150cb is copied to Bank2 (1 ms), and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to Bank0. Up to the contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and then Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously from the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second backup area 4150cc From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1ms). Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc from the content stored at the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are copied in order from the first address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, within the period of about 33.3 ms, various processes related to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of effects are executed. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled and the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched. Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the substrate 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, uses this as a trigger to cause main control serial data to be built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is within the period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the reception buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to the initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as a numerical value and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 regards the status allocated as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value is the same as the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

  In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the 1st byte of the above and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are shown in FIG. 101. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The received command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the received command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. The "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU4150a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. And the stored mode are stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 103 is input via the main control board 4100 will be described. To do. When this peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the power outage notice signal is input. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process which is the main routine is started and the power outage notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the power saving process is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, various LEDs are turned off, and so on. By suppressing the above, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external control RAM 4150c externally attached reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101 are converted into Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to and including the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, one byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU is copied. The core 4150aa transfers the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specifying the copy to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The contents up to this point are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). , A predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 4150a from being reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is not input in step S1312 or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power cut advance notice signal is input. That is, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. By continuously determining in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when the power failure advance notice signal is not input in step S1312. While the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 145 is restarted.

  As described above, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs due to the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not continuously input and released in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the power failure warning signal is not input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[15-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, a rotation detection switch history creation process executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. This rotation detection switch history creation processing creates history of detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. 43, respectively.

  When the rotation detection switch history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" is a bit). Of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and from the rotation detection switch 432b. The history of the detection signal is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

  Following step S1400, it is determined whether or not there are detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, among the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged at regular intervals in the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation portion 401 shown in FIG. While the one rotation detecting piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detecting switch 432a has transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detecting switch 432a, the one rotation detecting piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, it is determined that one rotation detection piece is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while the rotation detection switch 432b outputs When there is no such detection signal, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b from the blocking state to the non-blocking state.

  When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a or a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b in step S1402, shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information is performed (step S1404). In this rotation detection switch detection history information shift process, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5. , B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, while shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, while the rotation detection switch 432b If there is a detection signal from, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is set to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1. , B1 ← least significant bit B0, the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B Shifted by one bit towards the.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a or no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b in step S1402, shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information is performed (step S1408). In this shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection switch detection history information in step S1404 is performed, and when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read in step S1400. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is set to the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 to the most significant bit B7, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is changed to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B ← B1, B1 ← and so that the least significant bit B0, shifted by one bit toward the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine ends.

  As described above, every time this rotation detection switch history creation processing is executed, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. , The value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, so that the history of the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

  Next, based on the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above, is the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). ), A method of determining whether it is a clockwise rotation state or a counterclockwise rotation state will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the clockwise rotation of the dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 152 is the dial operation portion in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 153A is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. FIG. 153 (B) is a list chart showing ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switches involved, and FIG. 153 (B) is a list chart showing ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation portion. is there.

  As described above, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, " B ”represents a bit), and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is shown as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST in FIG. The history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Remembered For this reason, the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step), is rotating clockwise, or is counterclockwise. When it is determined whether or not the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and whether the detection determination values match. Depending on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100 and is copied to the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 when the power is turned on. Is read out and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, And the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. ing. That is, this determination is performed depending on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value.

  Specifically, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST have the value 1, the rotation detection switch 432a causes the dial operation unit 401 to continue after four 1 ms timer interrupts. It means that the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the rotation detection switch 410 has been detected. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401 following the generation of the timer interrupt.

  Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. Note that in FIGS. 151 to 153, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as “B”. Further, Step 1 to Step 4 shown below are four kinds of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 based on the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively, and when the dial operation unit 401 rotates, Step 1 , Step 2, step 3 and step 4, the rotational position shifts in sequence, and after step 4 shifts to step 1 again.

  When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 151, in step 1, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. By the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting the piece 410c. After that, as the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the clockwise direction to move to Step 3, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 is moved to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both rotated detection pieces. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting 410c. Then, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a by the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The rotation detecting switch 432b moves to the step of detecting the rotation detecting piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation portion 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 152, as step 1, both rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then, By the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a, and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c, but rotates. The detection switch 432b proceeds to the step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. After that, as the dial operation portion 401 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction to move to step 3, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The process proceeds to the step of not detecting the piece 410c. Then, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation portion 401, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the rotation detecting switch 432b shifts to a step in which the rotation detecting piece 410c is not detected.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned ON (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected) / OFF (the rotation detection piece 410c is not detected) operation as shown in FIG. As shown in, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both "ON" in step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is "OFF". Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a is kept "OFF" in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432b is turned "ON". After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

  On the other hand, in the ON / OFF operation of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), both of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are set to " The rotation detection switch 432b continues to be "ON" in step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432a is "OFF". Then, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned "OFF" in step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b is kept "OFF" in step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned "ON". After that, the process returns to step 1 again, and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both turned "ON".

  It should be noted that when the dial operation unit 401 stops without rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b does not change. There is no switching between ON / OFF operations by 432a and 432b.

  As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of Steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's operation, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated by detecting the ON / OFF switching of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The rotation direction can be grasped, and the fact that the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state can be grasped by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b have not been turned ON / OFF at all. You can

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a allows the player to hold down the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or palm while performing the control of rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise. When the rotation of 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not turned on or off at all. It can be understood that the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, is out of step.

[15-1-7. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, the signal is output to convey the fact. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 154, is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal, which has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. ing.

  Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. While it is determined that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the receiver and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is requested, When there is no LOCKN signal from the receiver ICSDIC0, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is not abnormal data (normal data), and the sub-liquid crystal transistor ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data. Connections between the emitter IC3420a and the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0, i.e. determines that the predetermined data pattern for checking the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (recovery) of (SYNC pattern) not sending request.

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection performed in step S1500 is performed. The history information LOCKN-HIST is converted from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. One bit is shifted toward the upper bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[15-1-8. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420a is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. And the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, whether there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 155, stores the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is stored. . As described above, when the LOCKN signal is determined by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 to be the abnormal drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, This is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, between the connection between the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the transmitter. Is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the receiver and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.”) ”In the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be as it is. This routine ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. It is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, whereas the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment when power is supplied or immediately before a power failure.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be defective is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is not reached, the value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. This is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a problem with the transmitter. A value of 1 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, whereas the communication error flag CC-FLG is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG at the moment of power transmission or immediately before a power failure.

[15-1-9. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. This connection recovery processing is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 155, and the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is performed. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, notify that when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal To do.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update processing of step S1020, it is determined whether the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data, First, it is determined whether or not the pointer is updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated. When the effect is completed according to the data and the updating of all the pointers is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. In this determination, is it a period during which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or a period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed? Whether or not it can be determined based on the screen generation schedule data, the period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the waiting state for customers. In the period during which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is being demonstrated, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later while the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displaying the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, Waiting for customers and demonstrating with LCD 1900 If not during the (mere is when the standby state of plying) so as to terminate the routine.

  When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect has been completed and the pointers have all been updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT has the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 in the determination of step S1522 in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. And the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 are connected, that is, the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up (cumulative number of times). Is counted). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state, the number of times is not 1 While the routine is finished, even if the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has occurred once, If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the number of accumulated times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver has definitely failed. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the value is 1, and between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has a problem has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, so that the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 sub-displays. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal It recovers the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is completed. In this communication error display processing, in order to inform that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, drawing is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. Perform processing. For example, a message "A defect has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, in the communication error display processing, during the period in which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or during the period in which the customer waits and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing the demonstration. Whether there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm the above, as a request for confirming the operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the receiver IC for sub liquid crystal ICSDIC0 sends the LOCKN signal. Send output request data A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU4150a as a response signal to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 when the LOCKN signal is not input and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. A process in which it is determined that a defect has occurred, and a notification image (for example, “A defect has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.”) Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, the notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device”) is repeatedly processed from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like provided on the door frame 5. At this time, a process of turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 5 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 4 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 shown in FIG. 102 will be described using the timing chart in FIG.

  First, a brief description will be given of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 included in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral controller steady processing of peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. 145. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 124 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. By the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 125, the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. 95, or the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game balls becomes a "big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 is one round. Up to 15 rounds, a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Then, that round is designed to be exhausted, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102 is a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 so that the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a decorative pattern 1900a on the left side, a decorative pattern 1900b on the center side, and a right side. The variable display of the decorative pattern 1900c is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is stopped so that the player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. That is, at this time, the upper special symbol display device 1185 or the lower special symbol display device 1180 shown in FIG. 91. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by 186 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c become translucent to such an extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the decorative pattern 1900a is a decorative pattern 1900b from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed from the center upper side to the center lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are in an opaque manner so that the background image at the position corresponding to the stopped and displayed decorative designs 1900a to 1900c becomes difficult to be visually recognized. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable start and stop state in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 shown in FIG. 91 and the liquid crystal display. The decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c, which start and stop variable display in the display area of the device 1900, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 uses the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 4100 that conveys the result, by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 157, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started in the display area of (at timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 101 is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which of the screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Therefore, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule data is being activated. In the meantime, that is, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped, the warning of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145. In the process, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. Is determined in step S1540 in the recovery process, it has become directly as to end the routine forces.

  As a result, even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 during the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c to the stop display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, a problem occurs between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver). Even if the number of times the state is determined to be one is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection restoration process is not performed, and the process of restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Communication in step S1548 in the connection recovery process. For example, the message "A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 without performing the color display process. The LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 uses the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. An image is displayed based on the received drawing data.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (timing K1), the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 are performed. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the effect is completed and the pointers are all updated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 are performed. One process of the warning process of S1024 and In the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 156 executed in step S1540, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of is not once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the connections is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, In other words, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the number of times does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG becomes a value. When it is not 0 (the value is 1), that is, when a failure has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the communication error display process described above is performed, and the routine is executed. To finish. In other words, while the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the upper limit value of the cumulative number CC-LMT even when the defective state is present even once in the connection. If it does not reach the value, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail to perform the process of recovering the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Connection between the receiver and receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of occurring has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication is performed. By performing the error display process without fail, for example, a process of displaying a message "A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. That is, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is validated.

  In the interval period until the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is started again, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Since the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are being stopped and displayed in the area, as described above, LOCKN from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data When the signal is validated and there is at least one failure state in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, With the receiver When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of the sub-liquid crystal has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed without fail, so that the transmitter IC 3420a for the sub liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal The cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are restored while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely in trouble), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the display area, "There was a problem with the sub LCD display device. Please call a salesclerk." It is adapted to perform a process for notifying to display the cormorant message.

  When the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is started again (timing K2), the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed because the screen generation schedule data is being activated as described above (timing K3). Up to the above, even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a failure between the connections (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is one, the SYNC pattern of step S1546 in the connection recovery process Output processing is not performed and the transmitter and receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The message "Please call the store clerk." Is not displayed. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that reports that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is transmitted. In addition to invalidating, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a.

  In this way, in the interval period until the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started again, the sub liquid crystal is displayed. While the LOCKN signal from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the transmitter transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is enabled, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. During the period from the start to the stop display, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, is invalidated. There is. This is information in which the combination of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the information of most interest to the player, and a jackpot gaming state in which a profit is given to the player occurs. Since the player can determine whether or not the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display is displayed until the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed. Even if the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the device 3450 is disturbed due to noise or the like and cannot be drawn correctly, the effect is interrupted in the middle of the process and the process of recovering the correctly drawn state is not performed. By stopping and displaying the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, The information of interest is to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 displays a startup screen on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or is in a customer waiting state. During the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the built-in liquid crystal output board serial I / O port to the differential circuit 3420d of the liquid crystal output board 3420, which is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted. There is. This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or during the period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and is being demonstrated. , A liquid crystal output substrate serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, and a sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the sub liquid crystal display device, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the liquid crystal output substrate serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d, As described above, the two signals that have been differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d are input to the forced switching circuit 3420c. The forcible switching circuit 3420c is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 3420d are input. One signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. When the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data from the liquid crystal output substrate serial I / O port, in the first place, a LOCKN signal output request is issued. As described above, since the data has a structure in which the data format is different from the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, it is determined to be abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is output to the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 and the liquid crystal output. Output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the board 3420. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a informs the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. Then, a notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk.”) Is displayed, and the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is controlled through the liquid crystal output board 3420. Notification to output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and to inform that effect (For example, "There is a problem with the sub liquid crystal display device.") Is output from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5 A notification sound is played. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the notification sound repeatedly emitted from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like provided in the door frame 5. . At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 5 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 4 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data from the built-in liquid crystal output substrate serial I / O port, the forced switching circuit 3420c causes the LOCKN signal output request data. Is connected in a circuit so that it can be received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data receives the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 as the peripheral control MPU4150a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it is determined that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that no problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. While it is Rukoto, it can be determined that when the LOCKN signal is not input trouble in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated as a failure in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is defective, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 156 as the notification process. ing. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a defect in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, it can notify the clerk or the like of the hall by performing a notification process. Before the player plays the game, the store clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has a problem, and the check does not take much time. Therefore, the trouble of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be found without any trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output board 3420 by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 is abnormal data. , A signal output to convey that fact, specifically, between the connection between the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, Since the signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. Sent When the image cannot be normally received, the LOCKN signal is transmitted in order to inform that the drawing data received is abnormal due to a communication failure between the image communication between the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. It can be output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the control unit 4150. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is started to be transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. By outputting the data to the device, it is possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can detect a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a so as to eliminate the defect. There is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by finding and solving a defect in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and outputs it to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, uses the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 for the sub liquid crystal when the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a cannot be normally received. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, which is the production control microprocessor. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 to notify that a communication failure has occurred. A message MGA of "There was a problem with the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk." In FIG. 160 (c) was generated, and this generated image was displayed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, it can be notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to that effect to notify the player of the problem. Since the person can inform the clerk of the hall, etc., or can directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. will have the trouble. It is possible to start work for solving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early detecting and eliminating a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 has a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and a sub liquid crystal receiver included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. When the connection between ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are in trouble even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined as is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate a communication failure between image communication is used for the sub liquid crystal. Sub liquid from transmitter IC 3420a The connection confirmation signal informing of the start of transmission to use the receiver ICSDIC0 the sub LCD transmitter IC3420a, until the cumulative number reaches the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, and is capable to continue to repeatedly output. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is stopped and displayed and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication failure is eliminated.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, during the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. If there is a problem in the connection between the and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication defects between image communication is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal transmitter. Sub liquid crystal from IC3420a When the main IC of the main control board 4100 continues to repeatedly output the connection confirmation signal to the receiver ICSDIC0 to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the control MPU 4100a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 to start the progress of the game again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, When the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU4150a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. Sound source of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 And it is capable of outputting an image built VDP4160a generates the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it becomes possible to move toward the direction where the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display device 1185 or the lower special symbol display device 1186 to start and stop the progress of the game. Only when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the non-execution period, the main control board 4100 Even if the control MPU 4100a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 to start the progress of the game again, the display of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 The distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the screen is every time the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts execution of the game again and ends (every time period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period)). ), It can be directed to resolve.

  Incidentally, a game machine has been proposed in which various images are displayed in a display area of an image display device such as the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, so that the player can enjoy the effect unfolded in this display region. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-30058 (FIGS. 18 to 24)). By the way, in the image display device in the gaming machine described in this document 1, for example, an effect with a high expectation that a jackpot gaming state that gives a profit to the player occurs is unfolded in the display area of the image display device. At this time, a problem occurs in the image display device for some reason, and this effect is distorted and displayed, which causes a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  Further, by displaying various images in the display area of the special symbol display device, which is the first display means, there has been proposed a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the effects unfolded in this display area (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-240151 (paragraphs [0044], [0050], and FIGS. 10 to 12). In the door frame of the gaming machine described in this document, a sub display device which is a second display means is arranged at a lower left position of an upper tray, and a predetermined situation regarding game information is displayed in a display area of the sub display device. Has been done. By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, a predetermined situation regarding game information is displayed in the display area of the sub-display device, so when a problem occurs in the sub-display device, it is displayed in the display area of the sub-display device. When the displayed image is disturbed, it is difficult for the player to understand the displayed content, which may reduce the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, by displaying various images in the display area of the special symbol display device which is the first display means, there has been proposed a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the effects unfolded in this display area (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-240151 (paragraphs [0044], [0050], and FIGS. 10 to 12). In the door frame of the gaming machine described in this document, a sub display device which is a second display means is arranged at a lower left position of an upper tray, and a predetermined situation regarding game information is displayed in a display area of the sub display device. Has been done. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, since a predetermined situation regarding game information is displayed in the display area of the sub display device, when a problem occurs in the sub display device, it is displayed in the display area of the sub display device. Distortion of the displayed image may make it difficult for the player to understand what is being displayed and may reduce the player's willingness to play. In addition, it is necessary to check whether or not the sub display device has a problem, which causes a problem that it takes time.

[16. Production]
Next, the effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 included in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 will be briefly described. Here, in the process of step S1530 in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 155, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG, so that the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal. When the connection between the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 3425 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are definitely in trouble, the trouble causes the game board 4 shown in FIG. A problem occurs in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 included in the sub liquid crystal unit 3400, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 cannot be used. The effect executed by substituting the area will be briefly described.

  The effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the effect. 95 by the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 124 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 125. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. Then, the number of times of repeating the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 (the number of rounds) is 15 rounds in total from 1 round to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), When a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 and the number of the balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is designed to be exhausted. Each time 3 game ball is 1 ball entering the sphere, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) game ball is adapted to be paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102 is a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the decorative pattern 1900a is provided on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The decorative pattern 1900b is displayed in the center, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1900c is started on the right side. It can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the special symbol display on the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 91. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed at 185 or below the special symbol display device 1186 is made to be able to check the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c become translucent to such an extent that the background image can be visually recognized. Is displayed from the center upper side to the center lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. There is.

  The variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a and 1900c is stopped with the same decorative pattern, and when the reach is formed, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. A rectangular substitute display area 1900e is formed in the right area, and an effect displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 which cannot be used due to a defect is displayed in the substitute display area 1900e. In this reach effect, if there is no defect in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the character CHR displayed in the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 makes a jumping motion toward the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the bent posture. In conjunction with this, the effect that the character CHR displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 jumps out and lands on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed.

  When the reach is formed, the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c disappear from the display area of the liquid crystal display area 1900, and in the substitute display area 1900e formed on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. As shown, the character CHR is displayed. The character CHR makes a jumping motion from a bent posture, jumps over the substitute display area 1900e, and jumps out toward the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to land. When the character CHR jumps over the substitute display area 1900e, the display of the substitute display area 1900e disappears from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the player can gaze at the trajectory of the character CHR jumping.

  When the character CHR lands, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 1900a to 1900a to 1900a to 1900a to 1900c to make it difficult to visually recognize the background image at the position corresponding to the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c. The 1900c becomes opaque, and a message MGA is displayed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, "A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." There is. This message MGA is displayed when the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes unusable due to a malfunction. When the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c start fluctuating, they disappear from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 are reliably connected to each other, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. When the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is present, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 included in the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. The effect unfolded in the display area is executed by substituting a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, as described above, in the connection failure determination process of FIG. 155 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, FIG. Based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 It is judged whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely in trouble. When the determination is made, the peripheral control unit power-on process cycle in FIG. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the control unit steady process, the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the scheduler update processing of step S1020, the pointer is updated so as to generate a composite screen (composite image), and the screen pointed to by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is displayed. Data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and displays it in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Sprite data for one screen (one frame) to be generated is created, and sprite data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is created, and based on these sprite data. Then, the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 160 (b) is generated in the built-in VRAM. The generated drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is the same as the channel shown in FIG. 102 by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145. Output from the CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 160B is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As described above, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and outputs it to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is sub-displayed when the image transmitted from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a cannot be normally received. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication defect occurrence signal indicating that a communication defect has occurred between the image communication between the liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 which is the production control microprocessor. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, can output the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. When controlling the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source so as to respectively generate a screen (image) to be displayed, a screen (image) to be displayed in the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed in the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can be controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in FIG. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a defect in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication defect during image communication, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in the liquid crystal display device 1900. By controlling the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in the display area, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed due to a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Even if the screen (image) cannot be displayed, the screen (image) to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with the screen (image) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And it is capable to prevent the screen should appear in area (image) is no longer provided to the player by the failure of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 97, the peripheral control board 4140 in FIG. 97, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 in FIG. 95 are provided. In the main control board 4100, the game ball fired by the hitting ball launching device 650 toward the game area 1100 partitioned and formed on the game board 4 has entered the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 of FIG. 95, which is the starting area. The main control MPU 4100a of FIG. 97, which is a game control microprocessor for advancing the game based on the above, is mounted. The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 of FIG. In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S86 in the processing, special lottery is performed, and control commands, which are various commands of FIGS. 120 and 121 based on the result of the winning / judgment determination result of this lottery, are set to the main control side of FIG. 125. This is output in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the timer interrupt processing. The peripheral control board 4140 generates the image to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 of FIG. 95 based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 4100. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, which is a production control microprocessor that controls the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the control unit 4160 to control the progress of production, is mounted. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is performing the production in the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. 147. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can display an image generated by the liquid crystal and VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3450 of FIG. 95, a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 of FIG. 102, and a sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of FIG. 117. . The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is arranged at a position different from that of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, by mounting the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the approximate center of the game board 4, whereas Since the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached to the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 arranged in the box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is arranged on the right side of the game board 4, so that Also, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 are arranged at different positions. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a transmits an image generated by the liquid crystal and VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160, and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. The image is received and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can display an image generated by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the image output from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0.

  When the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a cannot be received normally, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 informs that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, can be output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a generates a screen (first image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a screen (second image) displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, respectively. When controlling the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source as described above, it should be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 based on the input of the LOCKN signal which is the communication failure occurrence signal output from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) that combines the screen (second image) with the screen (first image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is like this.

  Specifically, in the connection failure determination process of FIG. 155 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, the sub liquid crystal drive shown in FIG. 117 is executed. Based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the substrate 3425, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, and If it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely in trouble, 145 peripheral control unit power-on process peripheral control unit steady process In the display data creation process of step S1030 in step S1030, a screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with a screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, the pointer is updated so as to generate a composite image), and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed in the periphery of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and displays it in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Sprite data for one screen (one frame) to be generated is created, and sprite data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is created, and based on these sprite data. Then, the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 160 (b) is generated in the built-in VRAM. The generated drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is the same as the channel shown in FIG. 102 by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145. Output from the CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 160B is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As described above, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and outputs it to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is sub-displayed when the image transmitted from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a cannot be normally received. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication defect occurrence signal indicating that a communication defect has occurred between the image communication between the liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 which is the production control microprocessor. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, can output the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. When controlling the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source so as to respectively generate a screen (image) to be displayed, a screen (image) to be displayed in the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed in the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can be controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in FIG. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a defect in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication defect during image communication, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in the liquid crystal display device 1900. By controlling the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed in the display area, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed due to a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Even if the screen (image) cannot be displayed, the screen (image) to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with the screen (image) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And it is capable to prevent the screen should appear in area (image) is no longer provided to the player by the failure of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

[17. Another example]
It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be implemented in various modes as long as they are within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the LOCKN signal output request data is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 during a period in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or in a customer waiting state. It was transmitted from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU4150a during the demonstration, but when the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed during the game by the player, It may be transmitted when the cumulative number of times the SYNC pattern output process is executed in step S1546 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 156 reaches a predetermined number. As described above, the SYNC pattern output process is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, thereby providing the sub liquid crystal output in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. The transmitter IC 3420a outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal It recovers the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Therefore, the SYNC pattern output process is repeatedly executed, which may cause some trouble in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Therefore, in order to check whether the device called the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is functioning normally, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the LOCKN signal output request data from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU4150a. When the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU4150a, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines that the device called the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is functioning normally. You can At this time, in the communication error display process executed in step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 156, the notification image is, for example, “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk. There is no problem with the receiver IC. ”) Is preferably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 155, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, but the connection failure determination process is executed. Each time, it may be directly determined whether or not the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is input. FIG. 161 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of connection failure determination processing in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal, and FIG. 161 (b) is an example of connection recovery processing in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal. It is a flowchart shown.

  The connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal shown in FIG. 161 (a) is the connection failure determining the presence or absence of the input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. It is a flowchart similar to the determination processing, and the processing for performing the same processing is given the step numbers in the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 155. Here, the different points will be described in detail. When the connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 illustrated in FIG. 100 causes the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 to operate as illustrated in FIG. 161 (a). It is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in (step S1522). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. While it is determined that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the receiver and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is requested, When there is no LOCKN signal from the receiver ICSDIC0, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is not abnormal data (normal data), and the sub-liquid crystal transistor ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data. Connections between the emitter IC3420a and the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0, i.e. determines that the predetermined data pattern for checking the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (recovery) of (SYNC pattern) not sending request. When there is a LOCKN signal from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1522, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1528, and this routine is terminated, while in step S1522, LOCKN from the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is set. If there is no signal, a value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG in step S1530, and this routine is ended.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The value is set to 1 when the connection has a problem and to the value 0 when there is no problem. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, whereas the communication error flag CC-FLG is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG at the moment of power transmission or immediately before a power failure.

  The connection recovery processing executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal shown in FIG. 161 (b) is based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 155. 156 is a flowchart similar to the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 156 executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process for determining the presence or absence of the input of FIG. 156. Regarding the same process, the steps in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. Numbered. Here, the different points will be described in detail. When the connection recovery process is started following the connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. If the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, if the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is converted in step S1540. When the effect is completed and the pointers are all updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined in step S1544 whether the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0. To do.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is, as described above, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the transmitter. The value is set to 1 when there is a failure in the connection with the receiver, and to 0 when there is no failure.

  When the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1544, that is, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (that is, the transmitter). (The connection between the receiver and the receiver) does not have a problem, the routine is ended as it is, and when the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, the liquid crystal is displayed. When a problem occurs between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), Up in S1548 Performs the communication error display processing, and the routine is terminated.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 155, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. The number of times that the LOCKN signal is determined to be input (cumulative number) each time the connection failure determination process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on HIST May determine whether the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT has been reached. 162, it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input each time this processing is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the connection failure judgment processing in the case of judging whether the number of times (cumulative number) that has been performed has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  It is determined that the LOCKN signal is input each time this processing is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information shown in FIG. 162. In the case of determining whether or not the number of times (cumulative number) has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the connection failure determination process is performed based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 155. It is a flowchart similar to the connection failure determination processing for determining the presence / absence of an input, and the processing for performing the same processing is given the step numbers in the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 155. Here, the different points will be described in detail. The number of times that it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input each time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal has been input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information (cumulative number ), The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 starts monitoring as shown in FIG. 162 when the connection failure determination process is started. It is determined whether the flag M-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1515). The monitoring flag M-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information in the connection failure determination process that is the last time this routine, and when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input. When it is determined that the value 1 and the LOCKN signal are not input, the value 0 is set. When the monitoring flag M-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1515, that is, when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information in the previous connection failure determination processing of this routine, the monitoring timer counter A value of 1 is added to MT-CNT (increment, step S1517). The monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is a counter that is incremented each time this routine (main processing) is executed from the time it is determined that the LOCKN signal has been input. 154 is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 of the peripheral control steady process in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 145, and the peripheral control steady process is repeatedly executed every 16 ms. The value obtained by multiplying the value of −CNT by 16 ms is the elapsed time from when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input.

  Subsequent to step S1517, or when the monitoring flag M-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S1515, that is, the LOCKN signal detection history information based on the LOCKN signal detection history information in the previous connection failure determination process of this routine. When it is determined that there is no input, in step S1520, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In step S1522, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value, the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1523), and in step S1524, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 is set. Communication is performed by determining that there is a problem in the connection between the provided sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub-liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the check counter CC-CNT, and it is determined whether the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period MT-SPN (step S1525).

  When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period MT-SPN, it is determined in step S1526 whether the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. . When the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT while the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 in step S1528 and this routine is ended when the number has not reached That is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value in step S1530. 1 is set, and the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1532). It sets the value 0 to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT (step S1534), and terminates this routine.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 155, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, and when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the value is 1, the transmitter When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is in a state of failure has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, whereas the communication error flag CC-FLG is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG at the moment of power transmission or immediately before a power failure.

  The value 0 is set to the monitoring flag M-FLG in step S1532, and the value 0 is set to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1534, so that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Whether the number of times it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input (cumulative number) has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT each time this processing is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined Whether or not it can be repeatedly determined. As a result, this process is executed even when the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Each time, it is possible to monitor again whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 does not match the connection confirmation determination value, the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to 0 (step S1536), and the monitoring timer counter is set. The value 0 is set in MT-CNT (step S1538), and this routine ends. Further, when the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1525 is not within the predetermined period MT-SPN, that is, the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is the predetermined period MT-SPN. Even when it exceeds, the value 0 is set to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538, and this routine is finished. In step S1536, the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to the value 0, and in step S1538, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to the value 0, so that the processing between the transmitter and the receiver is performed every time this processing is executed. It is possible to monitor again whether there is a problem with the connection.

  The number of times that it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input each time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal has been input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information (cumulative number ), The connection recovery processing shown in FIG. 156 is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing in the case of determining whether or not the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT has been reached. The monitoring flag M-FLG, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT, and the communication check counter CC-CNT are set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. On the other hand, the values are not reset by a momentary power failure or a power failure, and are restored to the values of the monitoring flag M-FLG, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT, and the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs when the power is restored. It has become so.

  As described above, even within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the LOCKN signal is detected based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. If it is determined even once that there is no input, the value 0 is set to the monitoring flag M-FLG in step S1536, and the value 0 is set to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538, so that this processing is executed. Each time, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be monitored again for any problems. When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1525 is not within the predetermined period MT-SPN, that is, the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is the predetermined period MT-SPN. If it exceeds (time out), the value 0 is set in the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538, but in reality, before the time out in step S1525, the LOCKN signal detection history is output in step S1522. If it is once determined that the LOCKN signal is not input based on the information LOCKN-HIST, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set in step S1538, or the communication check counter CC-CNT is accumulated in step S1526. Less than upper limit value CC-LMT If not (large), that is, if the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the monitoring timer counter in step S1534. The value 0 is set in MT-CNT.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 155, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Even if it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination processing is executed for the predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on LOCKN-HIST. Good. FIG. 163 (a) shows that the LOCKN signal is continuously output every time the connection failure determination process is performed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. FIG. 163 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of a connection failure determination process in the case of determining whether or not there is an input, and FIG. 163 (b) shows that the LOCKN signal has been input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing in the case where it is continuously determined whether or not a LOCKN signal is input every time the connection failure determination processing is executed for a predetermined period LMT.

  163 (a) shown in FIG. 163 (a), it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. The connection failure determination processing when determining whether or not there is an input is a flowchart similar to the connection failure determination processing that determines whether or not the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 155. The same process is indicated by the step number in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 155. Here, the different points will be described in detail. Based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is continuously input for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input. When the connection failure determination process in the case of starting is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs the peripheral control shown in FIG. 101 in step S1520 as shown in FIG. 163 (a). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the MPU 4150a, and in step S1522, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 is the connection confirmation determination. Does it match the value Determines whether or not. When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524 '). The monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is a counter that is incremented each time this routine (main processing) is executed from the time it is determined that the LOCKN signal has been input. 154 is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 of the peripheral control steady process in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 145, and the peripheral control steady process is repeatedly executed every 16 ms. The value obtained by multiplying the value of −CNT by 16 ms is the elapsed time from when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input.

  Following step S1524 ', it is determined whether the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period LMT (step S1527). In this determination, the LOCKN signal is continuously input for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, It is determined whether the time during which this LOCKN signal is input has reached LMT for a predetermined period.

  When it is determined in step S1527 that the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period LMT, that is, it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the predetermined The LOCKN signal is continuously input every time this process is executed for the period LMT, and when the time during which the LOCKN signal is input does not reach the predetermined period LMT, the communication abnormality flag FLG is set in step S1528. While setting the value 0 and ending this routine, when the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1527 is not within the predetermined period LMT, that is, based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. After it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input The LOCKN signal is continuously input each time this process is executed for the fixed period LMT, and when the time during which the LOCKN signal is input reaches the predetermined period LMT, the communication abnormality flag FLG is determined in step S1530. Is set to 1, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 (step S1534), and this routine is ended.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 163 (a) is performed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the connection has a failure and the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time it is executed, the value is set to 1 when the LOCKN signal is continuously input, and the value is set to 0 when the LOCKN signal is not continuously input. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, whereas the communication error flag CC-FLG is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG at the moment of power transmission or immediately before a power failure.

  By setting the value 0 to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1534, this processing is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time, it is possible to repeatedly determine whether or not the LOCKN signal is continuously input. As a result, even when a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and the LMT continues for a predetermined period, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is executed each time this processing is executed. It is possible to monitor again whether or not there is a problem.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 does not match the connection confirmation determination value, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 (step S1538), and this routine is executed. To finish. The value 0 is set in the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538, so that it is again monitored every time this processing is executed whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. You can do it. The monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, while it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. When the power is turned on, the value of the monitor timer counter MT-CNT is restored to the value immediately before or immediately before a power failure.

  When the connection failure determination processing is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. The connection recovery process executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process when determining whether or not a signal is input is the presence or absence of the input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 155. 156 is a flowchart similar to the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 156 that is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process for determining that the same process is denoted by the step numbers in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 156. . Here, the different points will be described in detail. Whether the LOCKN signal is continuously input each time the connection failure determination processing is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. When the connection recovery process is started subsequent to the connection failure determination process in the case of determining, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 illustrated in FIG. 100 displays the screen in step S1540 as illustrated in FIG. 163 (b). When the effect is proceeding according to the generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is finished as it is, while at step S1540, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data. When all the pointers have been updated, that is, the screen generation scan When Joule data has not been activated, the communication failure flag CC-FLG at step S1544 it is determined whether the value 0.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is, as described above, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the transmitter. FIG. 163 (a) shows the state in which the connection with the receiver is defective, for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time the connection failure determination process is executed, the value is set to 1 when the LOCKN signal is continuously input, and the value is set to 0 when the LOCKN signal is not continuously input.

  When the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1544, that is, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (that is, the transmitter). 163 (a) only for a predetermined period after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. When the LOCKN signal is not continuously input every time the connection failure determination process shown is executed, the SYNC pattern output process described above is performed in step S1546 and the routine ends while the communication error flag CC is terminated in step S1544. -FLG is not value 0 (value 1 Then, a problem occurs between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver). 163 (a) is executed for a predetermined period of time after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. When the LOCKN signal is continuously input, the communication error display processing described above is performed in step S1548, and this routine is ended.

  In the above-described embodiment, the relationship between the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is that the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value. The amount of change in the current flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes smaller as the combined resistance value changes with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 as the resistance value is changed toward the maximum resistance value of 100Ω. Is decreased to decrease the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 (see the solid curve in FIG. 118A). Of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the sub liquid crystal display device. The relationship between the brightness of the backlight 450 and the brightness of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 varies as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 changes from 100Ω which is the maximum resistance value to 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value. By reducing the change amount of the combined resistance value with respect to the change amount of the value, the change amount of the current flowing in the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the change amount of the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. The LED current adjusting circuit 3425f and the brightness adjusting circuit 3425g may each be configured to have a characteristic (characteristic curve) that the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight changes in a curved shape. Even with such a configuration, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed from the maximum resistance value of 100Ω to the minimum resistance value of 0Ω (zero Ω), a sub operation for changing the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is performed. By reducing the inclination of the characteristic curve of the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly brought close to the target resistance value of about 38Ω as in the present invention. When approaching the target resistance value of about 38Ω, the slope of the characteristic curve becomes smaller as approaching the target resistance value, and the operation amount for variably operating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is set to the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. By increasing the resistance as it approaches the resistance value, the resistance of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is reduced. The resistance value can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value of about 38Ω, and the adjustment is easy. Therefore, the fine adjustment of the brightness of the backlight can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5, but the operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and the right side of the dish unit 300 is also attached. The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 shown in FIG. 95 may be attached as the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. FIG. 164 is a perspective view of a door frame of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 20 and the like as seen from the front left side. The operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300 and the door unit is placed on the right side of the dish unit 300. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame 5'to which the plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is attached from the left front side. Briefly describing the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 ′, as shown in FIG. 164, an operation unit attachment portion 314c to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed in the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300. A liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of 314c. The upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when this portion is pressed downward by a player, for example, the portion is bent downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. As described above, the difference between the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 ′ is that the operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 while the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 ′ is attached. The operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the upper part of the above, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is attached to the right side of the plate unit 300. A small difference other than the above is that the shapes of the cover body 426 and the surface cover 428 of the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 are formed so as not to interfere with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470. And that the shape of the operation unit mounting portion 314c formed in the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is also formed so as not to interfere with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. 5, the shapes of the upper plate front decorative member 316, the upper plate upper lens 318, the upper plate upper inner lens 319, etc. of the plate unit 300 in FIG. 5 are formed so as not to interfere with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. There are almost no differences other than the above.

  In this case, since the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 accommodating the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is provided from the game board 4 to the door frame 5 ′, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, the paths to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 are the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the sub liquid crystal. The path is the drive substrate 3425, and the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes extremely long. Therefore, it is extremely susceptible to noise. As described above, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes long, as described above, in the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, "V- By adopting the differential type communication called "by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. The sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 will be provided on the game board 4 side.

  By replacing the game board 4 with a new game specification, the game board itself is replaced every predetermined period (for example, 3 months or 6 months), but the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is provided on the right side of the plate unit 300 as the upper plate. Since the upper side liquid crystal display device 470 is not replaced by being attached as the side liquid crystal display device 470 until it is shipped from the factory and discarded, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 are not replaced. , Peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, a path from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the transmitter and the receiver. Even if there is a problem with the connection between the The sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the smitter IC 3420a and outputs it to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, receives the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal when the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a cannot be normally received. So that a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred during image communication with the transmitter IC 3420a for use, can be output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, which is a production control microprocessor. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting a connection confirmation signal informing of starting signal to the sub-LCD transmitters IC3420a, thereby making it possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can detect a defect of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a so as to eliminate the defect. There is. As a result, from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 that is not replaced until it is shipped from the factory and discarded. Even if a failure occurs in the path extending to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure can be automatically resolved, so that the door frame 5 ' Can be used for a long time, and even if the door frame 5'has become available as a used product, the door frame 5'can be used for a long time and the life of the door frame 5'can be extended. . It should be noted that the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached as the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the right side of the plate unit 300 for the processes and effects described in detail in FIGS. 145 to 157 and 160 to 163. Needless to say, it can be carried out in any case.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, slot machines or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball).

  1 ... Pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 130 ... Side speaker, 222 ... Upper right speaker, 262 ... Upper left speaker, 821 ... Lower part Speaker, 400 ... Operation unit, 401 ... Dial operation section, 405 ... Press operation section, 1100 ... Gaming area, 1900 ... Liquid crystal display device (first display means), 2101 ... Upper starting port, 2102 ... Lower starting port, 3420 ... Liquid crystal output board, 3420a ... Sub liquid crystal transmitter IC (image transmitting means), 3420c ... Forced switching circuit, 3420d ... Differential circuit, 3425 ... Sub liquid crystal drive board, 3425b ... Backlight power supply circuit, 3425f ... LED current adjustment Circuit, 3425g ... Luminance adjusting circuit, 3430 ... Sub liquid crystal drive substrate box, 3430a ... Adjusting hole, 3450 ... Sub liquid crystal display Placement (second display means), 4100 ... Main control board (main control means), 4100a ... Main control MPU (game control microprocessor), 4110 ... Discharge control board, 4110b ... Power failure monitoring circuit, 4140 ... Peripheral control board ( Production control means), 4140a ... Volume control volume, 4150 ... Peripheral control unit, 4150a ... Peripheral control MPU (production control microprocessor), 4150c ... Peripheral control RAM, 4160 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4160a ... VDP with built-in sound source (image) Generating means) 4170 ... Lamp driving board, 4180 ... Motor driving board, SDIC0 ... Sub liquid crystal receiver IC (image receiving means), SDR5 ... Resistor, SDR6 ... Resistor, SDVR0 ... Luminance adjusting volume.

Claims (1)

A plurality of voice output means for outputting a notification sound for notifying an abnormal state to the gaming machine, and an effect sound due to the progress of the game,
Production display means,
First volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Production control means for controlling the voice output means and the production display means based on the progress of production,
A gaming machine comprising: a second volume adjusting means different from the first volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume output from the audio output means,
Of the first volume adjusting means and the second volume adjusting means, the first volume adjusting means is an adjusting means that cannot be operated by the player,
The effect control means,
Production sound volume adjustment control means for setting the volume of the production sound according to the operation by operating the first volume adjustment means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second sound volume adjusting means is operated to change the sound volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjusting control means in response to the operation. Control means,
Notification sound volume adjustment control means for setting the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying an abnormal state for the gaming machine in the abnormality notification period without depending on the sound volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means,
When the abnormality notification period occurs during the game, the notification sound is output at a volume that does not depend on the volume set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means, and is output before the abnormality notification period occurs. The volume of the effect sound is changed to mute, and while the effect sound is changed to mute, the effect sound is continued to proceed, and when the abnormality notification period ends, the notification sound output is changed. When the output is stopped and the abnormality notification period is generated, the volume of the effect sound that is changed to mute is set according to the operation on the second volume adjusting means before the abnormality notification period is generated. Production sound progress continuation control means for restoring and setting the volume changed by the change control means,
Sound output execution control means for executing control to output the effect sound and the notification sound from the sound output means,
The effect sound volume adjustment control means changes and sets the volume of the effect sound immediately when the first volume adjustment means is operated,
The notification sound volume adjustment control means,
The effect sound volume adjustment control means sets the volume of the effect sound to a low level according to the operation of the first sound volume adjustment means, or the effect sound volume change control means responds to the operation of the second sound volume adjustment means. In the state in which the volume of the effect sound set by the effect sound volume adjustment control means is being reduced, a volume higher than the volume of the effect sound is set as the volume of the notification sound,
The effect control means,
During the abnormality notification period, a notification sound can be output from the voice output means and the effect display means can perform notification display.